Kyocera FS C8025MFP C8020MFP_FS C8025MFP_OG_ENG User Manual To The 06751b40 F46f 47cc 91f5 8e31128eb8b4

User Manual: Kyocera FS-C8025MFP to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 377 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
Quick Guide
Menu Map
1 Preface
2 Preparation before Use
3 Common Operations
4 Copying
5 Printing
- Printing from Applications
- Printing Data Saved on the Printer
6 Sending
7 Document Box
8 Status / Job Cancel
9 Setup, Registration, and User Management
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

OPERATION GUIDE

FS -110 0

FS-1300D

870CKGB20008

*870CKGB20008*

FS-C8020MFP/FS-C8025MFP

Introduction

Thank you for your purchase of FS-C8020MFP/FS-C8025MFP.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a

simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine.

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party

supplies in this machine.

A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.

In this Operation Guide, FS-C8020MFP is referred to as 20 ppm model, and FS-C8025MFP is referred to as 25 ppm

model respectively.

Included Guides

The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations,

routine maintenance, and troubleshooting action.

Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine.

Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (FS-C8020MFP/

FS-C8025MFP)

Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be

sure to read this guide before using the machine.

DVD (Product Library)

Operation Guide (This Guide) Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and

troubleshooting.

FAX Operation Guide Describes fax functionality.

Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation

Guide

Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card.

KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER

Operation Guide

Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and

change settings.

Printer Driver User Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality.

Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install and use the network fax driver in order to use network fax

functionality.

KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation

Guide

Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe

Acrobat or Reader.

KMnet Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KMnet Viewer.

File Management Utility User Guide Describes how to distribute scanned documents over the network.

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical

Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Command

Reference

Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation.

Contents

1 Preface .....................................................................................................1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................... 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide .............................................................................. 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................... 1-3

Precautions for Use .................................................................................................... 1-3

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ..................................................................... 1-8

Legal and Safety Information ............................................................................................... 1-9

Legal Information ....................................................................................................... 1-9

Energy Saving Control Function .............................................................................. 1-12

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ............................................................................ 1-12

Paper Recycling ....................................................................................................... 1-12

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ................................................................ 1-12

About this Operation Guide ................................................................................................ 1-13

Conventions in This Guide ....................................................................................... 1-13

Originals and Paper Sizes ........................................................................................ 1-15

2 Preparation before Use ...........................................................................2-1

Part Names .......................................................................................................................... 2-2

Machine ...................................................................................................................... 2-2

Operation Panel ......................................................................................................... 2-6

Touch Panel ............................................................................................................... 2-7

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ................................................ 2-8

Connection Example .................................................................................................. 2-8

Preparing Necessary Cables ..................................................................................... 2-9

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................. 2-10

Connecting LAN Cable ............................................................................................. 2-10

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................ 2-11

Connecting the Power Cable ................................................................................... 2-11

Power On/Off ...................................................................................................................... 2-12

Power On ................................................................................................................. 2-12

Power Off ................................................................................................................. 2-12

Installing Software .............................................................................................................. 2-14

Installing Printer Driver ............................................................................................. 2-14

Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................... 2-18

Setting WIA Driver .................................................................................................... 2-19

Energy Saver function ........................................................................................................ 2-20

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ......................................................... 2-20

Sleep and Auto Sleep .............................................................................................. 2-21

Machine Setup Wizard ....................................................................................................... 2-22

COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ........................................................................ 2-23

Sending E-mail ......................................................................................................... 2-24

3 Common Operations ...............................................................................3-1

Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................... 3-2

Before Loading Paper ................................................................................................ 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassettes ................................................................................. 3-3

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................... 3-5

Loading Originals ................................................................................................................. 3-7

Placing Originals on the Platen .................................................................................. 3-7

Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................... 3-8

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number .......................................................................... 3-10

Checking the Counter ......................................................................................................... 3-11

Login/Logout ....................................................................................................................... 3-12

Login ........................................................................................................................ 3-12

Logout ...................................................................................................................... 3-13

Favorites ............................................................................................................................. 3-14

Registering Favorites ............................................................................................... 3-14

Editing and Deleting Favorites ................................................................................. 3-18

Using Favorites ........................................................................................................ 3-20

Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 3-22

Registering Shortcuts ............................................................................................... 3-22

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................. 3-24

Using Shortcuts ........................................................................................................ 3-25

Quick Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................ 3-26

Help Screen ........................................................................................................................ 3-28

Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................... 3-29

Using Various Functions .................................................................................................... 3-30

Common Functionality ............................................................................................. 3-31

Original Size ............................................................................................................. 3-32

Original Orientation .................................................................................................. 3-34

Mixed Size Originals ................................................................................................ 3-35

2-sided/Book Original ............................................................................................... 3-37

Continuous Scan ...................................................................................................... 3-39

Paper Selection ........................................................................................................ 3-41

Paper Output ............................................................................................................ 3-42

Collate/Offset ........................................................................................................... 3-43

Margin ...................................................................................................................... 3-45

Staple ....................................................................................................................... 3-48

Density ..................................................................................................................... 3-50

Scan Resolution ....................................................................................................... 3-51

Original Image .......................................................................................................... 3-52

Sharpness ................................................................................................................ 3-53

Background Density Adjust ...................................................................................... 3-54

Prevent Bleed-through ............................................................................................. 3-55

Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 3-56

File Format ............................................................................................................... 3-57

Color Selection ......................................................................................................... 3-59

Job Finish Notice ...................................................................................................... 3-60

File Name Entry ....................................................................................................... 3-62

Priority Override ....................................................................................................... 3-63

4 Copying ....................................................................................................4-1

Basic Operation .................................................................................................................... 4-2

Copying Functions ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Zoom .......................................................................................................................... 4-5

Duplex ........................................................................................................................ 4-8

Combine ................................................................................................................... 4-12

EcoPrint .................................................................................................................... 4-15

Hue Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 4-16

Color Balance ........................................................................................................... 4-17

Saturation ................................................................................................................. 4-18

Auto Image Rotation ................................................................................................ 4-19

Interrupt Copy ..................................................................................................................... 4-20

5 Printing .....................................................................................................5-1

Printing from Applications .....................................................................................................5-2

Printing Data Saved on the Printer ....................................................................................... 5-6

Private Print ................................................................................................................ 5-6

Proof and Hold ........................................................................................................... 5-8

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents ............................................... 5-11

iii

6 Sending ....................................................................................................6-1

Basic Operation .................................................................................................................... 6-2

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC ...................................................................... 6-5

Checking What to Enter for [Host Name] ................................................................... 6-5

Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name] ......................................................... 6-6

Creating a Shared Folder ........................................................................................... 6-7

Checking the [Path] .................................................................................................. 6-10

Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ........................................................ 6-11

Specifying Destination ........................................................................................................ 6-15

Choosing from the Address Book ............................................................................ 6-15

Choosing by One Touch Key ................................................................................... 6-17

Entering a New E-mail Address ............................................................................... 6-18

Specifying a New PC Folder .................................................................................... 6-19

Checking and Editing Destinations .......................................................................... 6-22

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ..................................... 6-23

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................... 6-24

Adding a Contact ...................................................................................................... 6-24

Adding a Group ........................................................................................................ 6-28

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ............................................................. 6-31

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ........................................................................... 6-33

Adding a Destination ................................................................................................ 6-33

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key ....................................................................... 6-35

Sending Functions ..............................................................................................................6-36

Sending Size ............................................................................................................ 6-37

File Separation ......................................................................................................... 6-39

E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................. 6-40

FTP Encrypted TX .................................................................................................... 6-41

WSD Scan .......................................................................................................................... 6-42

Scanning using TWAIN ...................................................................................................... 6-45

7 Document Box .........................................................................................7-1

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ..................................................... 7-2

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ............................................................. 7-5

Removing USB Memory ....................................................................................................... 7-8

Functions for Document Box ................................................................................................ 7-9

Duplex ...................................................................................................................... 7-10

Encrypted PDF Password ........................................................................................ 7-11

JPEG/TIFF Print ....................................................................................................... 7-12

XPS Fit to Page ........................................................................................................ 7-13

Storing Size .............................................................................................................. 7-14

8 Status / Job Cancel .................................................................................8-1

Checking Job Status ............................................................................................................8-2

Details of the Status Screens ..................................................................................... 8-3

Checking Job History ...........................................................................................................8-6

Sending the Log History ....................................................................................................... 8-7

Setting the Destination ............................................................................................... 8-8

Automatic Log History Transmission .......................................................................... 8-9

Manual Log History Transmission .............................................................................. 8-9

Setting E-mail Subject .............................................................................................. 8-10

Check of Device Status ...................................................................................................... 8-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ....................................................... 8-13

9 Setup, Registration, and User Management .........................................9-1

System Menu ....................................................................................................................... 9-2

Operation Method ...................................................................................................... 9-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................... 9-3

Language ................................................................................................................... 9-5

Report ........................................................................................................................ 9-5

User Property ............................................................................................................. 9-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ........................................................................................ 9-8

Common Settings ....................................................................................................... 9-9

Copy ......................................................................................................................... 9-15

Send ......................................................................................................................... 9-15

Printer ....................................................................................................................... 9-16

System ..................................................................................................................... 9-18

Date/Timer ............................................................................................................... 9-23

Adjustment/Maintenance .......................................................................................... 9-25

Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................... 9-27

User Login Administration .................................................................................................. 9-33

First User Login Administration ................................................................................ 9-33

User Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-34

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration ......................................................... 9-35

Adding a User .......................................................................................................... 9-37

Local User Authorization .......................................................................................... 9-41

My Panel .................................................................................................................. 9-42

Editing and Deleting Users ....................................................................................... 9-43

Simple Login ............................................................................................................ 9-46

Group Authorization ................................................................................................. 9-52

Obtain Network User Property ................................................................................. 9-56

Job Accounting ................................................................................................................... 9-58

First Job Accounting Setup ...................................................................................... 9-58

Job Accounting Settings ........................................................................................... 9-60

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting .......................................................................... 9-61

Login/Logout ............................................................................................................ 9-62

Adding an Account ................................................................................................... 9-63

Editing and Deleting Accounts ................................................................................. 9-65

Restricting the Use of the Machine .......................................................................... 9-67

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................... 9-69

Printing an Accounting Report ................................................................................. 9-71

Job Accounting Default Setting ................................................................................ 9-73

Unknown Login User Name Job .............................................................................. 9-75

10 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................10-1

Toner Container Replacement ........................................................................................... 10-2

Waste Toner Box Replacement ......................................................................................... 10-4

Replacing Staples ..............................................................................................................10-5

Cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 10-6

Glass Platen ............................................................................................................. 10-6

Document Processor ................................................................................................ 10-6

Solving Malfunctions .......................................................................................................... 10-8

Responding to Error Messages ........................................................................................ 10-13

Clearing Paper Jams ........................................................................................................ 10-23

Jam Location Indicators ......................................................................................... 10-23

Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................................................. 10-24

Inside the Right Cover 1 ......................................................................................... 10-24

Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................. 10-25

Inside the Right Cover 3 ......................................................................................... 10-25

Cassette 2 or 3 ....................................................................................................... 10-26

Optional Document Finisher ................................................................................... 10-26

Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam ................................................................ 10-27

Bridge Unit ............................................................................................................. 10-27

Document Processor .............................................................................................. 10-28

11 Appendix ................................................................................................11-1

Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment .............................................................................. 11-2

Paper Feeder (single cassette) ................................................................................ 11-3

Paper Feeder (double cassette) ............................................................................... 11-3

Document Finisher ................................................................................................... 11-3

FAX Kit ..................................................................................................................... 11-3

Expansion Memory .................................................................................................. 11-3

Card Authentication Kit ............................................................................................ 11-4

Gigabit Ethernet Board ............................................................................................. 11-5

USB Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 11-5

Optional Function ..................................................................................................... 11-5

Character Entry Method ..................................................................................................... 11-7

Entry Screens ........................................................................................................... 11-7

Entering Characters ................................................................................................. 11-9

Paper ................................................................................................................................ 11-10

Basic Paper Specifications ..................................................................................... 11-11

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ............................................................................ 11-11

Special Paper ......................................................................................................... 11-14

Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-18

Common functions ................................................................................................. 11-18

Copy functions ....................................................................................................... 11-19

Printer functions ..................................................................................................... 11-20

Scanner .................................................................................................................. 11-20

Document Processor .............................................................................................. 11-21

Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option) ................................................................. 11-21

Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option) ............................................................... 11-21

Document Finisher (option) .................................................................................... 11-22

Environmental Specifications ................................................................................. 11-22

Glossary ........................................................................................................................... 11-23

Index ...............................................................................................................................Index-1

vii

Quick Guide

To make copies

Simply press the Start key to make copies. You can also fine-tune the copy settings by changing the

paper size, adjusting the density, etc.

To print

You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory.

Be sure to read Precautions for Use before

using this machine.

It copies.

It prints.

Copying with

specific settings

Printing

Documents

Stored in

Removable USB

Memory

Print via a

network

What you want

to do

Setup

Connecting

Cables

Network Setup

(LAN Cable

Connection)

Install the printer driver on your

computer...2-14

Loading Paper...3-2

Originals...3-7

Operation Copying...4-2

Printing

Documents

Stored in

Removable USB

Memory...7-2

Printing from Applications...5-2

Administrator tasks

Print over

the USB

connection

Connect the

USB cable

viii

To send documents

You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in USB

memory.

* If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address directly.

It sends.

Send as E-mail Send to Folder

(SMB)

Saving

Documents to

USB Memory

What you want

to do

Setup

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

Plug the USB

memory

Editing Destination (Address Book/

Adding One Touch Keys)*...6-15

Loading Originals...3-7

Operation Sending...6-2

Saving Documents

to USB Memory

(Scan to USB)...7-5

Administrator tasks

Create a shared

folder on the

destination

computer...6-7

To send a FAX

As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.

* For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.

** If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the address directly.

NOTE

For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.

It faxes.

Send a FAX FAX directly from a computer

What you want

to do

Setup

Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line (Inch version only)

Network Setup (LAN Cable

Connection)

Loading Paper...3-2

Operation FAX Operation Network FAX Operation

Administrator tasks

Install the Network FAX

Driver on your computer*

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)**

Menu Map

Copies (page 4-3)

Paper Selection (page 3-41)

Zoom (page 4-5)

Density (page 3-50)

Duplex (page 4-8)

Combine (page 4-12)

Collate/Offset (page 3-43)

Functions Original Size (page 3-32)

Original Orientation (page 3-34)

Mixed Size Originals (page 3-35)

Paper Output (page 3-42)

Staple (page 3-48)

Color Selection (page 3-59)

Original Image (page 3-52)

EcoPrint (page 4-15)

Hue Adjustment (page 4-16)

Color Balance (page 4-17)

Sharpness (page 3-53)

Background Density Adj. (page 3-54)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-55)

Saturation (page 4-18)

Margin (page 3-45)

Continuous Scan (page 3-39)

Auto Image Rotation (page 4-19)

Job Finish Notice (page 3-60)

File Name Entry (page 3-62)

Priority Override (page 3-63)

Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-22)

One Touch Key (page 6-17)

Address Book (page 6-15)

Ext. Address Book (refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide)

E-mail (page 6-18)

Folder (page 6-19)

FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

WSD Scan (page 6-42)

Functions File Format (page 3-57)

Original Size (page 3-32)

Original Orientation (page 3-34)

Mixed Size Originals (page 3-35)

2-sided/Book Original (page 3-37)

Sending Size (page 6-37)

File Separation (page 6-39)

Scan Resolution (page 3-51)

Density (page 3-50)

Color Selection (page 3-59)

Original Image (page 3-52)

Sharpness (page 3-53)

Background Density Adj. (page 3-54)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-55)

FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Zoom (page 3-56)

Continuous Scan (page 3-39)

File Name Entry (page 3-62)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-40)

Job Finish Notice (page 3-60)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-41)

FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX Direct Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX Polling RX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-22)

xii

Job Box (page 5-6)

Removable

Memory

Menu Store File File Format (page 3-57)

2-sided/Book Original (page 3-37)

Scan Resolution (page 3-51)

Density (page 3-50)

File Name Entry (page 3-62)

Functions Original Size (page 3-32)

Original Orientation (page 3-34)

Mixed Size Originals (page 3-35)

Storing Size (page 7-14)

Color Selection (page 3-59)

Original Image (page 3-52)

Sharpness (page 3-53)

Background Density Adj. (page 3-54)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 3-55)

Zoom (page 3-56)

Continuous Scan (page 3-39)

Job Finish Notice (page 3-60)

Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-22)

Print Copies (page 7-3)

Paper Selection (page 3-41)

Collate/Offset (page 3-43)

Duplex (page 7-10)

Functions Paper Output (page 3-42)

Staple (page 3-48)

Color Selection (page 3-59)

Margin (page 3-45)

Job Finish Notice (page 3-60)

Priority Override (page 3-63)

Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-11)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-12)

XPS Fit to Page (page 7-13)

Add/Edit Shortcut (page 3-22)

Sub Address Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

xiii

Print Job Status (page 8-3)

Send Job Status (page 8-4)

Store Job Status (page 8-5)

Scheduled Job (page 8-5)

Print Job Log (page 8-6)

Send Job Log (page 8-6)

Store Job Log (page 8-6)

Scanner (page 8-11)

Printer (page 8-12)

FAX (page 8-12)

Removable Memory (page 8-12)

Toner Status (page 8-13)

Paper Status (page 8-13)

Staple (page 8-14)

xiv

Quick Setup Wizard

(page 3-26)

FAX Setup (page 3-26)

Energy Saver Setup (page 3-26)

Language (page 9-5)

Report (page 9-5) Report Print (page 9-5) Status Page (page 9-5)

Font List (page 9-5)

Network Status (page 9-5)

Service Status (page 9-6)

Accounting Report (page 9-6)

Sub Address Box List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX List (Index) (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX List (No.) (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Outgoing FAX Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Incoming FAX Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Admin Report Settings (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Result Report Setting

(page 9-6)

Send Result Report (page 9-6)

RX Result Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Job Finish Notice Setting (page 9-6)

Send Log History (page

8-7)

Manual Log History Transmission (page 8-9)

Auto Sending (page 8-9)

Destination (page 8-8)

Job Log Subject (page 8-10)

Counter Printed Pages (page 3-11)

Scanned Pages (page 3-11)

User Property (page 9-

User Name (page 9-7)

Access Level (page 9-7)

Account Name (page 9-7)

E-mail Address (page 9-7)

Simple Login (page 9-7)

My Panel (page 9-7)

Group Name (page 9-7)

Group ID (page 9-7)

Cassette/MP Tray

Settings (page 9-8)

Cassette 1 (to 3) (page

9-8)

Paper Size (page 9-8)

Media Type (page 9-8)

Multi Purpose Tray

(page 9-8)

Paper Size (page 9-8)

Media Type (page 9-8)

Common Settings

(page 9-9)

Default Screen (page 9-9)

Sound (page 9-9) Buzzer (page 9-9) Volume (page 9-9)

Key Confirmation (page 9-9)

Job Finish (page 9-9)

Ready (page 9-9)

Warning (page 9-9)

Key Confirmation (USB Keyboard) (page 9-9)

FAX Speaker Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX Monitor Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Original Settings (page

9-9)

Custom Original Size (page 9-9)

Original Auto Detect (page 9-10)

Paper Settings (page 9-

10)

Custom Paper Size (page 9-10)

Media Type Settings (page 9-10)

Default Paper Source (page 9-10)

Paper Selection (page 9-10)

Media for Auto (Color) (page 9-10)

Media for Auto (B & W) (page 9-10)

Special Paper Action (page 9-11)

xvi

Function Defaults (page

9-12)

File Format (page 9-12)

Original Orientation (page 9-12)

Collate/Offset (page 9-12)

File Separation (page 9-12)

Scan Resolution (page 9-12)

Color Selection (Copy) (page 9-12)

Color Select.(Send/Store) (page 9-12)

Original Image (page 9-12)

Background Density Adj. (page 9-12)

EcoPrint (page 9-12)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 9-12)

FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Zoom (page 9-12)

Margin (page 9-12)

Continuous Scan (page 9-12)

Auto Image Rotation (page 9-12)

File Name Entry (page 9-13)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 9-13)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 9-13)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 9-13)

XPS Fit to Page (page 9-13)

Detail Settings (page 9-

13)

Image Quality (page 9-13)

PDF/A (page 9-13)

Paper Output (page 9-

13)

Copy/Document Box (page 9-13)

Printer (page 9-13)

FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Preset Limit (page 9-13)

Error Handling (page 9-

14)

Duplexing Error (page 9-14)

Finishing Error (page 9-14)

No Staple Error (page 9-14)

Stapling Limit Error (page 9-14)

Paper Mismatch Error (page 9-14)

Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 9-14)

Color Toner Empty Action (page 9-14)

Measurement (page 9-14)

Keyboard Layout (page 9-15)

USB Keyboard Type (page 9-15)

xvii

Copy (page 9-15) Auto Paper Selection (page 9-15)

Auto % Priority (page 9-15)

Reserve Next Priority (page 9-15)

Send (page 9-15) Dest. Check before Send (page 9-15)

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 9-15)

Send and Forward

(page 9-16)

Forward (page 9-16)

Destination (page 9-16)

Color TIFF Compression (page 9-16)

Default Screen (page 9-16)

Document Box Sub Address Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Job Box (page 5-6) Quick Copy Job Retention (page 5-8)

Deletion of Job Retention (page 5-11)

Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Address Book/One

Touch

Address Book (page 6-24)

One Touch Key (page 6-33)

Address Book Defaults Sort

Print List (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

xviii

User Login/Job

Accounting

User Login Settings

(page 9-33)

User Login (page 9-35)

Local User List (page 9-37)

Simple login settings

(page 9-46)

Simple Login (page 9-46)

Simple Login Setup (page 9-46)

Local User Authorization (page 9-41)

Group Authorization

Set. (page 9-52)

Group Authorization (page 9-52)

Group List (page 9-52)

Obtain NW User Property (page 9-56)

Job Accounting

Settings (page 9-58)

Job Accounting (page 9-61)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-71)

Total Job Accounting

(page 9-69)

Printed Pages (page 9-69)

Scanned Pages (page 9-69)

FAX TX Pages (page 9-69)

FAX TX Time (page 9-69)

Counter Reset (page 9-69)

Each Job Accounting (page 9-69)

Accounting List (page 9-63)

Default Setting (page 9-

73)

Apply Limit (page 9-73)

Copier/Printer Count (page 9-73)

Default Counter Limit (page 9-73)

Count by Paper Size (page 9-74)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-75)

Printer (page 9-16) Emulation (page 9-16)

Color Setting (page 9-16)

EcoPrint (page 9-16)

Override A4/Letter (page 9-16)

Duplex (page 9-16)

Copies (page 9-16)

Orientation (page 9-16)

Wide A4 (page 9-17)

Form Feed TimeOut (page 9-17)

LF Action (page 9-17)

CR Action (page 9-17)

Paper Feed Mode (page 9-17)

Gloss Mode (page 9-17)

xix

System (page 9-18) Network (page 9-18) Host Name (page 9-18)

TCP/IP (page 9-18) TCP/IP (page 9-18)

IPv4 Settings (page 9-18)

IPv6 Settings (page 9-19)

Protocol Detail (page 9-20)

Netware (page 9-21)

AppleTalk (page 9-21)

WSD Scan (page 9-21)

WSD Print (page 9-21)

Enhanced WSD (page 9-21)

Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 9-21)

IPSec (page 9-22)

Secure Protocol (page

9-22)

SSL (page 9-22)

IPP Security (page 9-22)

HTTP Security (page 9-22)

LDAP Security (Ext. Address Book) (page 9-22)

LDAP Security (User Property) (page 9-22)

LAN Interface (page 9-22)

Interface Block Setting

(page 9-22)

USB Host (page 9-22)

USB Device (page 9-22)

Optional Interface 1 (page 9-22)

Optional Interface 2 (page 9-22)

Security Level (page 9-4)

Restart (page 9-4)

RAM Disk Setting (page 9-23)

Main Memory (page 9-23)

Optional Memory (page 9-23)

Optional Function (page 11-5)

Date/Timer (page 9-23) Date/Time (page 9-23)

Date Format (page 9-23)

Time Zone (page 9-23)

Auto Panel Reset (page 9-23)

Auto Sleep (page 9-23)

Sleep Level (page 9-24)

Auto Error Clear (page 9-24)

Low Power Timer (page 9-24)

Panel Reset Timer (page 9-24)

Sleep Timer (page 9-24)

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 9-24)

Error Clear Timer (page 9-24)

Unusable Time (refer to Fax Operation Guide)

Adjustment/

Maintenance (page 9-

25)

Density Adjustment

(page 9-25)

Copy (page 9-25)

Send/Box (page 9-25)

Background Density

Adj. (page 9-25)

Copy (Auto) (page 9-25)

Send/Box (Auto) (page 9-25)

Toner Save Level

(EcoPrint) (page 9-25)

Copy (page 9-25)

Printer (page 9-25)

Auto Color Correction (page 9-25)

Correcting Black Line (page 9-25)

Display Brightness (page 9-25)

Color Registration (page 9-25)

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 9-26)

Drum Refresh (page 9-26)

Calibration (page 9-26)

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 9-26)

DP Adjustment (page 9-26)

1-1

1 Preface

This chapter explains the following topics:

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Legal and Safety Information ............................................................................................................................. 1-9

Legal Information ..................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-12

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ......................................................................................................... 1-12

Paper Recycling ..................................................................................................................................... 1-12

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-12

About this Operation Guide .............................................................................................................................. 1-13

Conventions in This Guide ..................................................................................................................... 1-13

Originals and Paper Sizes ..................................................................................................................... 1-15

1-2

Preface > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Preface > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

• Humidity: 15 to 80 %

However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a

temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the following

locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as

contact with your eyes and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-4

Preface > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.

Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.

The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.

1-5

Preface > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this

machine, the label is on the right.

3. Optical unit

When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label

located on the cover of the optical unit.

4. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

5. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

255c205c

1-6

Preface > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension.

WARNING

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and

Part 18 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try

to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device contains the module (FCC ID: E522K0A0540, IC: 1059B-2K0A0540), which complies with Part 15 of FCC

Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to

authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)

This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1-7

Preface > Notice

Warranty (the United States)

205c/255c

MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY

Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant

the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories

installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for

a period of one (1) year, or 200,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In

the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s

only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.

Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.

This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the

original MFP for a period of one year or 200,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance

Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement

Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new

Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the

Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not

able to provide service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the

Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at

http:// www.kyoceramita.com.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to

operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have

been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera

Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,

which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is

authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF

THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

1-8

Preface > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

1-9

Preface > Legal and Safety Information

Legal and Safety Information

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is

prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other

countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations ™ and ® will not be used in

this Operation Guide.

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl/.

Open SSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

1-10

Preface > Legal and Safety Information

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)”

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”

The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you

must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1-11

Preface > Legal and Safety Information

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

1-12

Preface > Legal and Safety Information

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of

time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state

but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of

time.

Sleep

The device automatically enters Sleep when 20 minutes (for the 20 ppm model) or 30 minutes (for the 25 ppm model)

have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated

may be lengthened. For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-21.

Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The

amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more

information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-20.

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information refer to Duplex

on page 4-8.

Paper Recycling

This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service

representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the

ENERGY STAR.

1-13

Preface > About this Operation Guide

About this Operation Guide

This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Conventions in This Guide

The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.

Chapter Contents

1Preface Includes information about operating precautions, trademarks, and this manual.

2Preparation before Use Provides information about part names, connecting cables, and setting up and

configuring the machine.

3Common Operations Explains overall machine operation, including loading paper and originals and logging in

and out.

4Copying Describes the functions you can use when copying.

5Printing Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machine as a

printer.

6Sending Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.

7Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.

8Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being

printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device

status and how to cancel fax transmission.

9Setup, Registration, and User

Management

Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation, job

accounting, and user management.

10 Troubleshooting Explains how to respond to error indications such as when the machine runs out of

toner and problems such as paper jams.

11 Appendix Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.

Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.

Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.

Convention Description Example

Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen. Press the Start key.

[Regular] Indicates the touch panel keys. Press [OK].

Italic Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel. Ready to copy is

displayed.

Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional

information.

For more information

refer to Sleep and Auto

Sleep on page 2-21.

NOTE Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference.

NOTE

IMPORTANT Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems.

IMPORTANT

Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown

and how to deal with it. Caution

1-14

Preface > About this Operation Guide

Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons.

In this guide, steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red.

E.g.) Select [Zoom].

Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and/or touch panel operations are numbered as follows:

E.g.) Select [Functions] and then [EcoPrint].

Icon Description Icon Description

This function can be set while copying a

document.

This function can be set while printing from USB

memory.

This function can be set while sending a

document.

This function can be set while saving a file to USB

memory.

Copy

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Copy Screen

GB0001_01

Print from

USB

Print Screen

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

GB0097_00

Send

Send Screen

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

Scan to

USB

Store File Screen

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

GB0096_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Image

Text+Photo

10:10

EcoPrint

Off

Full Color

Color Selection

Hue Adjustment

2/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0002_01

GB0001_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

1-15

Preface > About this Operation Guide

Originals and Paper Sizes

This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.

As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is

indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.

Icons on the Touch Panel

The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.

Placement direction Indicated size*

* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. For further

details, refer to the page detailing that function or source tray.

Vertical

direction

For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer than B.

A4, B5, A5, Letter,

Statement

Horizontal

direction

For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.

A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,

Letter-R, Statement-R

Placement

direction

Originals Paper

Vertical

direction

Horizontal

direction

Original Paper

1-16

Preface > About this Operation Guide

2-1

2 Preparation before

Use

This chapter explains the following topics:

Part Names ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-2

Machine ................................................................................................................................................... 2-2

Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6

Touch Panel ............................................................................................................................................. 2-7

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables .............................................................................. 2-8

Connection Example ................................................................................................................................ 2-8

Preparing Necessary Cables ................................................................................................................... 2-9

Connecting Cables ........................................................................................................................................... 2-10

Connecting LAN Cable .......................................................................................................................... 2-10

Connecting USB Cable ........................................................................................................................... 2-11

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................................................. 2-11

Power On/Off ................................................................................................................................................... 2-12

Power On ............................................................................................................................................... 2-12

Power Off ............................................................................................................................................... 2-12

Installing Software ............................................................................................................................................ 2-14

Installing Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 2-14

Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................................................. 2-18

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................................................. 2-19

Energy Saver function ...................................................................................................................................... 2-20

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................................................................... 2-20

Sleep and Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................................ 2-21

Machine Setup Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 2-22

COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ...................................................................................................... 2-23

Sending E-mail ...................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-2

Preparation before Use > Part Names

Part Names

Machine

1Document Processor

2Platen

3Original Size Indicator Plates

4Slit Glass

5Operation Panel

6Inner Tray

7Front Cover

8Cassette 1

9USB Memory Slot (A1)

10 Right Cover 1

11 Handles

12 Job Separator Tray

811

2-3

Preparation before Use > Part Names

13 Original Width Guides

14 Original Table

15 Cleaning Cloth Compartment

16 Original Loaded Indicator

17 Toner Container (Black)

18 Toner Container (Magenta)

19 Toner Container (Cyan)

20 Toner Container (Yellow)

21 Waste Toner Box

22 Paper Width Guide

23 Paper Length Guide

24 Multi Purpose Tray

25 Paper Width Guide

13 14

22 25

2-4

Preparation before Use > Part Names

26 Option Interface Slot 2

27 Network Interface Connector

28 USB Interface Connector (A2)

29 USB Port (B1)

30 Option Interface Slot 1

31 Scanner Lock

32 Main Power Switch

33 Handles

34 Cassette Heater Switch

2928

30 32

2-5

Preparation before Use > Part Names

35 Top Cover

36 Tray Extension

37 Document Finisher Tray

38 Staple Cover

39 Staple Cartridge Holder

40 Bridge Unit Cover

3536 37

38 39

2-6

Preparation before Use > Part Names

Operation Panel

Touch panel. Displays buttons

for configuring machine

settings.

Lights when there is paper in

the job separator tray.

Processing: Blinks while printing or sending.

Memory: Blinks while the machine is accessing the

fax memory or USB memory (generalpurpose item).

Attention: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and

a job is stopped.

Displays the System Menu/Counter

screen.

Displays the Status/Job

Cancel screen.

Displays the Copy screen.

Displays the Favorites

screen.

Displays the screen for

sending.

Displays the Document

Box screen.

Displays the FAX screen.

Select the color mode.

Auto Color: Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or

black & white and then scans the document.

Full Color: Scans all documents in full color.

Black & White: Scans all documents in black & white.

Displays the Interrupt Copy

screen.

Ends operation (logs out) on

the Administration screen.

Puts the machine into Low

Power Mode.

Puts the machine into Sleep

Mode. Recovers from Sleep

if in Sleep Mode.

Lit when the machine's main

power is on.

Numeric keys.

Enter numbers and

symbols.

Clears entered numbers and

characters.

Returns settings to their

default states.

Specifies registered

information such as address

numbers and user IDs by

number.

Cancels or pauses the

printing job in progress.

Finalizes numeric key entry,

and finalizes screen during

setting of functions. Operates

linked with the on-screen [OK].

Starts copying and

scanning operations and

processing for setting

operations.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

2-7

Preparation before Use > Part Names

Touch Panel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

FavoritesShortcut 1 Shortcut 2

Displays the status of the

equipment as well as necessary

operation messages.

Displays available functions.

Configures more advanced function

settings.

Displays the time and number of

copies.

Displays shortcuts.

GB0001_04GB0002_00

Displays the status of the

equipment as well as necessary

operation messages.

Displays available functions and

settings.

Return to the previous screen.

Scrolls up and down when the list of

values cannot be displayed in its

entirety on a single screen.

Registers functions as shortcuts.

Displays Favorites.

2-8

Preparation before Use > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Determining the Connection Method and

Preparing Cables

Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables for your

environment.

Connection Example

Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.

Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)

Administrator’s PC

COMMAND CENTER

Network settings, Scanner

default settings, User and

destination registration

Printing

Network FAX

(Option)

FAX (Option)

MFP

USB

Network

FAX

Network

Send E-mail

Sends the image data of scanned

originals to the desired recipient as

a file attached to an E-mail

message.

X 6-18

Send SMB

Saves the scanned image as a data

file on your PC.

X 6-19

Send FTP

Sends the scanned image as a

data file on the FTP.

X 6-19

TWAIN Scanning

WIA Scanning

TWAIN and WIA are standardized

interface for communication

between software applications and

image acquisition devices.

2-9

Preparation before Use > Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Preparing Necessary Cables

Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use.

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the machine. Printer/Scanner/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) LAN (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or

1000BASE-T Shielded)

Connect a USB cable to the machine. Printer USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)

2-10

Preparation before Use > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner.

1Power Off.

2Connect the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

3Set up the machine.

Configure the network settings.

For details, refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2-22.

Check that the indicators are off.

2-11

Preparation before Use > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer or scanner in an environment where there is

no network.

1Power Off.

2Connect the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

Connecting the Power Cable

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

Check that the indicators are off.

2-12

Preparation before Use > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

When the main power indicator is lit... (Recovery from sleep)

Press the Power key.

When the main power indicator is off...

Turn the main power switch on.

Power Off

When not turning off the main power switch (sleep)

Press the Power key. The Power key light will go out, and the Main Power indicator will light

up.

IMPORTANT

When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again

immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.

Main Power indicator

2-13

Preparation before Use > Power On/Off

When turning off the main power switch

Note that when the main power switch is turned off, the machine will be unable to

automatically receive print data from computers or faxes.

1Press the Power key.

Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up.

2Turn the main power switch off.

In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time

NOTE

When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit up, the machine is operating.

Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to

malfunction.

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off

at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period

of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety

precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at

the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.

IMPORTANT

Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it

from humidity.

Check that the indicators are off.

Main Power indicator

2-14

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the

printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.

Installing Printer Driver

Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the DVD.

Installing Printer Driver in Windows

If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC, follow the next steps to install the printer driver. The example

shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC.

You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. Express Mode automatically detects

connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and

select the software to be installed. For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD.

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

NOTE

Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before

continuing. Refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-20 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-

21.

The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.

NOTE

If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays, select Cancel.

If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run Setup.exe.

If the user account management window appears, click Allow.

Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.

2-15

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

3Install using Express Mode.

1Select the print system to be installed.

2Customize the print system name if the print system is connected via a network.

3Start installing.

4Finish the installation.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure. Follow the on-screen instructions to

restart the system, if required.

The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected

via a network. You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode.

NOTE

The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine,

verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on

and click Reload.

If the Windows security window appears, click Install this driver software anyway.

2-16

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver, continue by configuring the TWAIN driver

(2-18) or WIA driver (2-19).

Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the Kyocera icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click either OS X 10.2 and 10.3 Only, OS X 10.4 Only or OS X 10.5 or higher

depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

Next, specify the print settings. If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used, the settings below are

required. If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and

connected.

NOTE

When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine’s emulation to “KPDL” or “KPDL(Auto)”. For details about

the configuration method, refer to Printer on page 9-16.

If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to Network on page 9-18.

In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

Double-click

2-17

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Display the window.

2Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection

and then enter the IP address and printer name.

3Select the options available for the machine and click Continue.

4The selected machine is added.

2-18

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Select Start button of the Windows display, All Programs, Kyocera and then TWAIN

Driver Setting.

2Click Add.

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

3Finish registering.

NOTE

When the machine’s IP address is unknown, contact Administrator.

NOTE

Click Delete to delete the added machine. Click Edit to change names.

Enter the machine name.

Select this machine from the list.

Enter the machine's IP address or host name.

When user login administration is enabled, select

the checkbox beside Authentication, and enter

Password (up to 64 characters).

When job accounting is enabled, select the

checkbox beside Account ID, and enter the

account ID as many as eight digits.

When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

2-19

Preparation before Use > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search. Click

View scanners and cameras in the search list.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press the Properties.

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you

have specified during installation of WIA Driver.

Enter the machine name.

When user login administration is enabled, select the checkbox beside

Authentication, and enter Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and

Password (up to 64 characters).

When job accounting is enabled, select the checkbox beside Account

ID, and enter the account ID as many as eight digits.

When using SSL, select the

checkbox beside SSL.

2-20

Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function

Energy Saver function

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode

To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on

the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver, Power, and Main

Power indicators. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and

starts printing. Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when

using the optional fax, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within

10 seconds.

• Press any key on the operation panel.

• Open the document processor.

• Place originals in the document processor.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to

respond more slowly.

Auto Low Power Mode

Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for

a preset time. The default preset time is 3 minutes.

For more information about configuring settings, refer to Low Power Timer on page 9-24.

2-21

Preparation before Use > Energy Saver function

Sleep and Auto Sleep

To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will

go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is

referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the touch panel lights up and printing starts.

When using the optional fax, received data is printed out while the operation panel remains

unlit.

To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be ready to use within 23 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to

respond more slowly.

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the

Low Power Mode. The default preset time is 20 minutes (for the 20 ppm model) and 30

minutes (for the 25 ppm model).

For more information about configuring settings, refer to Sleep Timer on page 9-24.

Energy Saver

This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode, and allows Sleep

Mode to be set separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB

cable is not available while the machine is asleep.

To use the machine, press the Power key. The time required for the machine to wake up from

power save mode and resume normal operation will be longer than for normal Sleep Mode.

For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to Sleep Level on page 9-24.

NOTE

If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.

2-22

Preparation before Use > Machine Setup Wizard

Machine Setup Wizard

The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed.

Following the instructions on the screen to configure the following settings:

For details about settings, refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel.To make

changes after this initial configuration, refer to Date/Timer on page 9-23 and System on page 9-18.

Date/Time settings Time Zone

Summer Time

Date

Time

Network settings Obtain IP Address

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Machine setup

10:10

This wizard will help you set up

your machine.

To continue, press [Next >].

< Back Next >

1. Date/Time

2. Network

System Menu/Counter.

GB0889_00

2-23

Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the

settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.

E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/

The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as

well as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each

category must be set separately.

If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter a password to access pages

other than the startup page. The default password is “admin00.” The password can be

changed.

For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.

NOTE

Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the

FAX, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.

The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

2-24

Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

Sending E-mail

Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:

• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server: A full-time connection via a LAN is

recommended.

• SMTP Settings: Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.

• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.

1Display the screen.

2Configure the function.

Enter the correct settings in each field.

Item Description

SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be

enabled.

SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.

SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of

the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the

name, a DNS server address must also be configured. The DNS server

address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before

SMTP as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft

Exchange 2000.

Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a

different account.

be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user

name is 64 characters.

2-25

Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

3Click [Submit].

used for authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64

characters.

POP before SMTP

Timeout

Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have

selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.

Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the

value is 0, no maximum size is set.

Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such

as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go

to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be

entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the

sender address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the

end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the

machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.

Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum

length of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail

addresses.

Item Description

2-26

Preparation before Use > COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

3-1

3 Common Operations

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Before Loading Paper .............................................................................................................................. 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassettes ............................................................................................................... 3-3

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................................................. 3-5

Loading Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 3-7

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 3-7

Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................................................ 3-8

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number ....................................................................................................... 3-10

Checking the Counter ....................................................................................................................................... 3-11

Login/Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 3-12

Favorites .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-14

Registering Favorites ............................................................................................................................. 3-14

Editing and Deleting Favorites ............................................................................................................... 3-18

Using Favorites ...................................................................................................................................... 3-20

Shortcuts .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-22

Registering Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................. 3-22

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts ............................................................................................................... 3-24

Using Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................... 3-25

Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 3-26

Help Screen ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-28

Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 3-29

Using Various Functions .................................................................................................................................. 3-30

Original Size .......................................................................................................................................... 3-32

Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................ 3-34

Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 3-35

2-sided/Book Original ............................................................................................................................ 3-37

Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 3-39

Paper Selection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-41

Paper Output ......................................................................................................................................... 3-42

Collate/Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 3-43

Margin .................................................................................................................................................... 3-45

Staple ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-48

Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-50

Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 3-51

Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 3-52

Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 3-53

Background Density Adjust .................................................................................................................... 3-54

Prevent Bleed-through ........................................................................................................................... 3-55

Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-56

File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 3-57

Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 3-59

Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 3-60

File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 3-62

Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 3-63

3-2

Common Operations > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option

(refer to Optional Equipment on page 11-2).

Before Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

1Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle.

2Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled.

3Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers.

4Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.

If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may

cause a jam.

Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a

cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or

cassettes back in the paper storage bag.

If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that

is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled, turn the stack in the cassette upside down.

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to Paper on page 11-10.

3-3

Common Operations > Loading Paper

Loading Paper in the Cassettes

The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The standard cassette holds up to 500

sheets of plain paper (80 g/m²).

The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R,

B5, B5-R, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, and 16K.

1Adjust the cassette size.

Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded. Paper sizes are marked on

the cassette.

NOTE

You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

For clearer and brighter color copies, use the special color paper.

When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type

setting. (Refer to Media Type on page 9-8) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g/m². If you are using

a paper weight between 106 and 256 g/m², set the media type to Thick.

If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the

cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

NOTE

When using 11 × 17” (ledger) paper, lay the paper length guide down flat.

3-4

Common Operations > Loading Paper

2Load paper.

IMPORTANT

Load the paper with the print side facing up.

Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or

folded may cause paper jams.

Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the figure).

When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up.

The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the

paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams.

Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If

there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

3-5

Common Operations > Loading Paper

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m²) or up to 25 sheets of plain paper

(80 g/m²) lager than A4.

The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K-R and

16K. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m²), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets

• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m²), recycled paper or color paper: 25 sheets

• Hagaki: 20 sheet

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets

• Heavy paper (106 to 256 g/m²): 10 sheets (when using heavy paper with a weight of 164 g/m² or greater, only A4/

Letter or smaller sheets can be loaded)

1Adjust the multi purpose tray size.

When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray section

of the multi purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media

type setting. (Refer to Cassette/MP Tray Settings on page 9-8.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m² or

more, set the media type to Thick.

NOTE

When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9-8.

When you use special paper such as thick paper, select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9-8.

3-6

Common Operations > Loading Paper

2Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load envelope with the print side facing down.

IMPORTANT

Load the paper with the print side facing down.

Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

Straighten the top edge if it is curled.

When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over

in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount

of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the

left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the

paper back into the tray.

IMPORTANT

Use unfolded return postcard (Oufukuhagaki).

How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of

envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong

direction or on the wrong face.

Return postcard

(Oufukuhagaki)

Cardstock

(Hagaki) Portrait form

envelopes

Landscape form

envelopes

Close the flap.

Open the flap.

3-7

Common Operations > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

Open the document processor, and place the original.

NOTE

Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original

eject table. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is

opened.

Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals.

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive

pressure may crack the platen glass.

When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document

processor in the open position.

Align it flush against the

original size indicator plates

with the back left corner as

the reference point.

Put the scanning

side facedown.

3-8

Common Operations > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned.

Originals Supported by the Document Processor

Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor

• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets

• Transparencies such as OHP film

• Carbon paper

• Originals with very slippery surfaces

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Wet originals

• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried

• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Crumpled paper

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

How to Load Originals

1Adjust the original table size.

Weight 45 to 160 g/m² (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m²)

Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5

Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R

Capacity Plain paper (80 g/m²), Colored paper, Recycled paper: 50 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (157 g/m²): 25 sheets

Thick paper (120 g/m²): 33 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

IMPORTANT

Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the

original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

3-9

Common Operations > Loading Originals

2Load Originals.

Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading

edge into the document processor as far as it will go.

Original Loaded Indicator

The original loaded indicator lits depending on how originals are placed.

Indications and their status are as follows.

• Green (left indicator) lit: Original is placed properly.

NOTE

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum

level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure).

Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the

original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the

holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

3-10

Common Operations > Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

NOTE

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative.

Please check the number before contacting your Service Representative.

12 7.2

XXX XXXXXXXXX

3-11

Common Operations > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of pages printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

2Check the counter.

Select the job you wish to check.

[Printed Pages]

Scroll the screen to check the number of pages. Pressing [Count by Paper Size] and then

[Black & White] allows you to check the number of pages by paper size.

[Scanned Pages]

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Quick Setup Wizard

10:10

Language

Report

Counter

1/5

GB0054_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Printed Pages

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Scanned Pages

< Back

1/1

Counter

GB0584_00

Counter - Printed Pages

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Copy (Full Color)

Copy (B & W)

Printer (B & W)

Copy (Total)

1/3

End

GB0585_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Counter - Scanned Pages

706

10:10System Menu/Counter.

FAX

Others

Total

Copy

1/1

End

732

GB0589_00

3-12

Common Operations > Login/Logout

If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine.

Refer to Adding a User on page 9-37 for the default login user name and password.

Normal login

1Enter the login user name.

If this screen is displayed during operations, press [Keyboard] to enter the login user name.

The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

2Enter the login password.

Press [Password] to enter the login password.

NOTE

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

GB0723_00

GB0057_00

GB0057_01

3-13

Common Operations > Login/Logout

3Log in.

Simple Login

If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.

Refer to Simple Login on page 9-46.

Logout

To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key.

• When the Auto Sleep function is activated.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

• When Auto Low Power Mode is activated.

• When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key.

NOTE

If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or

Network can be selected as the authentication destination.

NOTE

If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

2500

****

Enter login user name and password.

GB0723_01

10:10

Select the user to login.

None

1/3

GB0023_00

3-14

Common Operations > Favorites

Favorites

Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily.

The following functions are pre-registered on this machine. You can delete these functions as well as register new

functions. The functions created by the external software, such as File Management Utility, are also displayed here.

• ID Card Copy

• Paper Saving Copy

• Scan to PC (Address Entry)

• Scan to PC (Address Book)

• Scan to E-mail (Address Entry)

• Scan to E-mail (Address Book)

Registering Favorites

When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up:

•Wizard mode: Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one.

•Program mode: Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered.

1Configure the function.

When registering favorites in program mode, configure the copy function, send function, fax

function (option), destination, or other setting to register.

2Display the screen.

NOTE

Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

Favorites

㪤㪼㫅㫌

10:10

1/1

Select the function.

ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC(Addre

ess Entry)

Scan to PC(Addre

ss Book)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Entry)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Book)

GB0056_00

Add

10:10

Edit

Delete

1/1

GB0779_00

3-15

Common Operations > Favorites

3Select the job type.

When you select the wizard mode

Select the function. Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard.

4Enter a name.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

5Check the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

[Name]

NOTE

When the job type is Copy, the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed.

Add - Job Type

10:10Select the job type.

Send

FAX

Copy

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Add - Function Type

10:10Select how to recall the function.

Wizard

Program

< BackCancel

1/1

Next >

GB0763_00

GB0764_00

Add - Functions

10:10

File Format

Cancel

1/6

Next >< Back

Original Size

Original Orientation

Mixed Size Originals

PDF

Auto

Top Edge on Top

Off

Add - Destination Recall Method

10:10

Address Book

Cancel

1/2

Next >< Back

Ext. Address Book

One Touch Key

Address Entry (E-mail)

GB0767_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0769_00

GB0057_80

Add - Confirmation

Sending Job - E-mail

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

Admin

< Back

1/2

Save

Auto

GB0766_00

GB0057_81

3-16

Common Operations > Favorites

[Number]

[Permission]

Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other

users.

[Destination]

When the job type is [Send] or [FAX], selects the Destination Recall Method.

[Functions]

If you selected wizard mode, check the function and make changes as necessary.

[Function Type]

Add - Confirmation

Sending Job - E-mail

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

Admin

< Back

1/2

Save

Auto

GB0760_00

Number

10:10

(00 - 20)

Cancel OK

GB0766_00

Permission

10:10

Shared

Private

Cancel

1/1

GB0305_00

Add - Confirmation

Private

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Destination

Functions

Function Type

Permission

Address Book

Wizard

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0766_02

Destination

10:10

Address Book

1/2

OKCancel

Ext. Address Book

One Touch Key

Address Entry (E-mail)

Add - Confirmation

Private

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Destination

Functions

Function Type

Permission

Address Book

Wizard

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0771_00

GB0766_02

Functions

10:10

File Format

Cancel

1/6

Original Size

Original Orientation

Mixed Size Originals

PDF

Auto

Top Edge on Top

Off

GB0773_00

Add - Confirmation

Private

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Destination

Functions

Function Type

Permission

Address Book

Wizard

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0766_02

Function Type

10:10

Wizard

Program

< Back

1/1

GB0775_00

Add - Confirmation

Private

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Destination

Functions

Function Type

Permission

Address Book

Wizard

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0766_02

3-17

Common Operations > Favorites

6Register the favorite.

Add - Confirmation

Sending Job - E-mail

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

Admin

< Back

1/2

Save

Auto

GB0766_00

3-18

Common Operations > Favorites

Editing and Deleting Favorites

This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorites and how to delete favorites.

1Display the screen.

2Edit or delete a favorite.

To edit a favorite

1Select the favorite you wish to edit.

2Edit the favorite.

[Name]

[Number]

Favorites

㪤㪼㫅㫌

10:10

1/1

Select the function.

ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC(Addre

ess Entry)

Scan to PC(Addre

ss Book)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Entry)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Book)

GB0056_00

Edit

10:10

Next >Cancel

1/2

01 Sending Job - E-mail

15 ID Card Copy

16 Paper Saving Copy

17 Scan to PC(Addreess Entry)

Add

10:10

Edit

Delete

1/1

GB0779_00

GB0780_00

Favorites:E-mail TX

10:10

Cancel

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

< Back

1/2

Save

Admin

Sending Job - E-mail

GB0781_00

GB0057_82

Favorites:E-mail TX

10:10

Cancel

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

< Back

1/2

Save

Admin

Sending Job - E-mail

GB0760_00

Number

10:10

(00 - 20)

Cancel OK

GB0781_00

3-19

Common Operations > Favorites

[Permission]

Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users.

3Register the favorite.

To delete

Select the favorite you wish to delete.

Favorites:E-mail TX

Shared

10:10

Cancel

Functions

Function Type

Permission

< Back

2/2

Save

Wizard

Address BookDestination

Permission

10:10

Shared

Private

Cancel

1/1

GB0305_00

GB0781_02

Favorites:E-mail TX

10:10

Cancel

Job Type

Number

Owner

Name

Multi Sending

< Back

1/2

Save

Admin

Sending Job - E-mail

GB0781_00

10:10

DeleteCancel

1/2

01 Sending Job - E-mail

15 ID Card Copy

16 Paper Saving Copy

17 Scan to PC(Addreess Entry)

Delete

Add

10:10

Edit

Delete

1/1

GB0779_00

GB0782_00

3-20

Common Operations > Favorites

Using Favorites

Call up settings from a favorite.

1Display the screen.

2Select a favorite.

When using the wizard mode

1The registered screens are displayed in order. Make the desired settings.

2Confirm the settings and start the job.

NOTE

To edit the settings, press [<Back] and make changes as desired.

GB0056_00

Favorites

㪤㪼㫅㫌

10:10

1/1

Select the function.

ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC(Addre

ess Entry)

Scan to PC(Addre

ss Book)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Entry)

Scan to E-mail(A

ddress Book)

Set Combine.

Combine

Off 2 in 1 4 in 1

Others

10:10

Next >Cancel

Density

10:10Adjust the density.

Lighter

< Back

Normal

-3

Darker

-2 -1 0

Next >Cancel

+1 +2 +3

GB0008_99

GB0016_99

GB0057_99

GB0820_00

Confirmation

1Copies

10:10

Cancel

Paper Selection

Zoom

Density

Copies

Auto

100%

< Back

1/6

Start

Press [Start] to start copying.

Normal 0

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-21

Common Operations > Favorites

When using the program mode

Select a favorite to call up registered settings.

Press the Start key to start the job.

3-22

Common Operations > Shortcuts

Shortcuts

Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up easily.

Registering Shortcuts

You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.

The following types of shortcuts are available:

1Display the screen.

Press [Functions] on the Copy, Send, or Document Box screen and then [Add/Edit Shortcut].

2Select [Add].

3Select the key.

Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut.

Private Shortcut Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user. They can only be set while using

user login administration.

Shared Shortcut Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users. When using user login administration, shared

shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators.

NOTE

If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be

replaced with a new one.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_00

Add/Edit Shortcut

Add

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Edit

1/1

Delete

GB0790_00

10:10Select the key to add shortcut.

Private Shortcut 2

Private Shortcut 1

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Add

Shared Shortcut 1

Shared Shortcut 2

GB0791_00

3-23

Common Operations > Shortcuts

4Select the function.

Select the function screen to display with the shortcut.

5Enter the shortcut name.

Up to 24 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

6Register the shortcut.

Confirm the settings and press [Save]

10:10Select the functions.

Zoom

Density

Duplex

Paper Selection

< BackCancel

1/5

Next >

Add - Functions

GB0792_00

GB0057_04

Add - Confirmation

Shortcut 1

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Name

Functions

Number

< Back

1/1

Save

Zoom

Shortcut 1

GB0793_00

3-24

Common Operations > Shortcuts

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts

Change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.

1Display the screen.

Press [Functions] on the Copy, Send, or Document Box screen and then [Add/Edit Shortcut].

2Edit or delete a shortcut.

To edit a shortcut

1Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit.

2Edit the shortcut.

[No.]

[Name]

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

FavoritesShortcut 1 Shortcut 2

GB0001_04

GB0002_00

Edit

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Private Shortcut 2

Private Shortcut 1

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Shared Shortcut 2

Shared Shortcut 1

Add/Edit Shortcut

Add

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Edit

1/1

Delete

GB0790_01

GB0796_00

Number

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 1

Cancel

1/1

Edit - Confirmation

Shortcut 1

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Name

Functions

Number

< Back

1/1

Save

Zoom

Shortcut 1

GB0797_00

GB0794_00

Edit - Confirmation

Shortcut 1

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Name

Functions

Number

< Back

1/1

Save

Zoom

Shortcut 1

GB0057_60

GB0797_00

3-25

Common Operations > Shortcuts

3Register the shortcut.

To delete

Select the shortcut you wish to delete.

Using Shortcuts

The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy, Send, FAX*, Print from USB Memory, or

Save to USB Memory or Polling Box* initial screen. Pressing [Shortcut] will switch to the

registered function's screen.

* Requires the optional fax kit.

Edit - Confirmation

Shortcut 1

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Name

Functions

Number

< Back

1/1

Save

Zoom

Shortcut 1

GB0797_00

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Cancel

1/1

Delete

Private Shortcut 2

Private Shortcut 1

Shared Shortcut 2

Shared Shortcut 1

Add/Edit Shortcut

Add

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Edit

1/1

Delete

GB0790_01

GB0798_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

FavoritesShortcut 1 Shortcut 2

GB0001_04

3-26

Common Operations > Quick Setup Wizard

Quick Setup Wizard

Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard:

1Display the screen.

2Select a function.

3Configure the function.

Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low-power mode.

1. Sleep Mode Sleep Mode - Auto Sleep, Sleep Mode - Sleep Timer,

Sleep Mode - Sleep Level

2. Low Power Mode Low Power Mode - Low Power Timer

FAX Setup*

* This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed.

Configures basic fax settings.

1. Dialing/RX Mode Dialing/RX Mode - Dialing Mode, Dialing/RX Mode - Reception Mode,

Dialing/RX Mode - Auto (DRD)

2. Local FAX Info. Local FAX Info. - Local FAX Number, Local FAX Info. - Local FAX ID,

Local FAX Info. - Print Position

3. Sound Volume Sound Volume - Confirmation, Speaker Volume, Monitor Volume

4. Rings Rings - Confirmation, Answering Machine, FAX/TEL Switch

5. Output Output - Paper Output, Output - Reduced RX Size

6. Redial Redial - Retry Times

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Quick Setup Wizard

10:10

Language

Report

Counter

1/5

GB0054_00

FAX Setup

10:10System Menu/Counter.

< Back

1/1

Energy Saver Setup

Quick Setup Wizard

GB0840_00

FAX Setup

10:10

This wizard will help you set

the basic settings to use the fax.

End Next >

1. Dialing/RX Mode

2. Local FAX Info.

3. Sound Volume

4. Rings

5. Output

6. Redial

System Menu/Counter.

GB0841_00

3-27

Common Operations > Quick Setup Wizard

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to Help Screen on page 3-28.

End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.

<< Previous Returns to the previous item.

Skip >> Advances to the next item without setting the current item.

Next > Advances to the next screen.

< Back Returns to the previous screen.

Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.

Local Fax Info.

10:10

Set the dialing and reception mode.

End Next >

1. Dialing/RX Mode

2. Local FAX Info.

3. Sound Volume

4. Rings

5. Output

6. Redial

System Menu/Counter.

Skip >>

GB0846_00

3-28

Common Operations > Help Screen

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.

When the [?] (help) is displayed on the touch panel, you can press it to display the Help screen.

How to read the screen

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Paper Selection

Auto A4 A4

A4 A4

10:10

Cancel OK

Plain Plain

GB0004_00

Paper Selection

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray

with the desired paper size.

Auto: Automatically selects the appropriate

paper size.

Cassette 1: Selects the paper in cassette 1.

Cassette 2: Selects the paper in cassette 2.

Cassette 3: Selects the paper in cassette 3.

MP Tray: Selects the paper in the multi-purpose

tray.

1/2

Help titles

Displays information about

functions and machine

operation.

Closes the Help screen and

returns to the original

screen.

Scrolls up and down when

the help text cannot be

displayed in its entirety on a

single screen.

GH0001_00

3-29

Common Operations > Canceling Jobs

Canceling Jobs

Cancel any print or send job being executed.

1Press the Stop key.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

Canceling… will be displayed, and the current job will be canceled.

When there is a job printing or on standby

Select the job you wish to cancel and press [Delete].

Canceling printing from a computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the

Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document

menu.

NOTE

The current print job is temporarily interrupted. Continues without temporarily interrupting

jobs being sent.

You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after checking their status. Refer to

Status / Job Cancel on page 8-1.

10:10Canceling...

Scanned Pages

Cancel

Job No.:0001 Job Name:doc00000120101010101010

GB0222_01

Job Cancel

10:10The job will be canceled.

doc0000952010092810...

Delete CloseMenu

2/30

1/1

0095

Pause All

Print Jobs

GB0717_00

Displays details for individual jobs.

3-30

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Using Various Functions

This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying, sending, and the document box.

1Display the screen.

Press the key of each function.

When using USB memory, plug it into the USB memory slot (A1).

Press [Yes] on the displayed screen.

When printing from USB memory, select the file to be printed and press

[Print].

When storing a document to USB memory, select the folder where the

file will be stored and press [Menu] and then [Store File].

For details, refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory on page 7-2 or Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to

USB) on page 7-5.

2Select the functions.

Select the functions to use.

Press [Functions] to display all the functions.

Refer to Common Functionality on page 3-31.

NOTE

If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the

Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

3-31

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Common Functionality

Functionality related to originals

Functionality related to document quality

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Specify the original size. Original Size X page 3-32

Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction. Original Orientation X page 3-34

Scan mixed size originals. Mixed Size Originals X page 3-35

Automatically scan 2-sided originals. 2-sided/Book Original X page 3-37

Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job. Continuous Scan X page 3-39

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Specify the paper size and type. Paper Selection X page 3-41

Change the paper output. Paper Output X page 3-42

Collate the output documents in page order.

Offset the output documents by set.

Collate/Offset X page 3-43

Add margins (white space). Margin X page 3-45

Staple in the output documents. Staple X page 3-48

Adjust the density. Density X page 3-50

Set the resolution at which to scan originals. Scan Resolution X page 3-51

Select original image type for best results. Original Image X page 3-52

Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.

Blur the image outline.

Sharpness X page 3-53

Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals. Background Density Adjust X

page 3-54

Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals. Prevent Bleed-through X page 3-55

Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size. Zoom X page 3-56

Select the file format for images being sent or stored. File Format X page 3-57

Change the color mode. Color Selection X page 3-59

Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice X page 3-60

Add a file name to the job to easily check its status. File Name Entry X page 3-62

Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority. Priority Override X page 3-63

3-32

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Original Size].

2Select the original size.

[Auto]

Auto Automatically detects the size of the original.

Metric Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, B6, Folio, or 216 × 340 mm.

inch Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Statement, 11 × 15", or Oficio II.

Others Select from 8K, 16K-R, 16K, Hagaki, Oufukuhagaki, or Custom*

* For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to Custom Original Size on page 9-9.

Size Entry Enter the size.

Inch models — Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models — Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm

increments)

NOTE

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Original Size

Auto Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Size Entry

GB0025_00

3-33

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

[Metric], [inch], or [Others]

Select the original size.

[Size Entry]

Press the text box displaying the numbers and use [-]/[+] or the numeric keypad to enter a

value.

Original Size - Metric

10:10

1/4

OK< BackCancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Original Size

Auto Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Size Entry

GB0025_00

GB0026_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Original Size - Size Entry

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

X (50 - 432)

< BackCancel

Y (50 - 297)

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Original Size

Auto Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Size Entry

GB0025_00

GB0029_00

3-34

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

•Duplex

• Margin

• Combine

• Staple (option)

When placing originals on the platen

When placing originals on the document processor

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Original Orientation].

2Select the function.

Select the original orientation.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0036_00

3-35

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.

Supported Combinations of Originals

• B4 and B5

• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

• Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Mixed Size Originals].

NOTE

When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio and A4-R, make

sure to set Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Original

Auto Detect on page 9-10.

Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals.

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-36

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Select the function.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Mixed Size Originals

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0035_00

3-37

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2-sided/Book Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

1-sided Set when using a 1-sided sheet original.

2-sided Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or

right.

Book Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound

on the left.

Other

Settings

2-sided/

Book

Original

1-sided Set when using a 1-sided sheet original.

2-sided (Binding Left/

Right)

Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or

right.

2-sided (Binding Top) Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound at the top.

Book (Binding Left) Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound

on the left.

Book (Binding Right) Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound

on the right.

Original Orientation*

* This function is displayed when [2-sided (Binding Left/Right)] or [2-sided (Binding Top)] is selected.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct

direction.

Send

Scan to

USB

Functions

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided

10:10

Sending Size

300x300dpi

Off

File Separation

Scan Resolution

2/6

Same as Original Size

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_01

Send

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-38

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Select the type of original.

[2-sided] or [Book]

[Others]

2Select the type of original.

3Select the original orientation.

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Scan to USB

GB0096_00

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided 2-sided Book

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to send.

GB0013_00

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided 2-sided Book

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to send.

2-sided/Book Original - 2-sided/Book Original

10:10Ready to send.

2-sided (Binding Left/Right)

2-sided (Binding Top)

Book (Binding Left)

1-sided

Cancel

1/2

2-sided/Book Original - Others

2-sided/Book Original

10:10

Cancel < Back

1/1

1-sided

Ready to send.

GB0014_00

GB0011_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

2-sided/Book Ori... - Original Orientation

10:10

Top Edge on Left

Top Edge on Top

Cancel

1/1

Ready to send.

GB0015_00

2-sided/Book Original - Others

2-sided/Book Original

10:10

Cancel

Original Orientation

< Back

1/1

2-sided (Binding Left/Right)

Top Edge on Top

Ready to send.

GB0014_01

3-39

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Continuous Scan

Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. Originals will

be scanned continuously until you press [Finish Scan].

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Continuous Scan].

2Select the function.

3Scan the originals.

Load the original and press the Start key to start scanning.

Once the original has been scanned, load the next original and press the Start key. Use the

same procedure to scan any remaining originals.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Saturation

10:10

Margin

Off

Continuous Scan

Auto Image Rotation

4/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Continuous Scan

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0043_00

3-40

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

4Finish scanning.

Start copying, sending, or storing.

Job No.:0003

10:10Place the originals and press Start key.

Scanned Pages

Cancel

Job Name:doc00000320101010101010

Finish

Scan

GB0222_00

3-41

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Paper Selection].

2Select the paper source.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

[2] (Cassette 2) and [3] (Cassette 3) are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

[M] indicates the MP tray.

When selecting MP tray, specify the paper size and the media type. The available paper sizes

and media types are shown in the table below.

NOTE

Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Cassette/MP Tray Settings on page

9-8).

Paper Size Metric: Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R,

Folio or 216 × 340 mm.

inch: Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive or Oficio II.

others: Select from 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope

#9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufukuhagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 or Custom.

Size Entry: Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.

Inch models – X: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in

0.01" increments)

Metric models – X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 98 to

297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Media Type Plain (105 g/m² or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m² or less),

Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m² and more), Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1-8

Copy

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Paper Selection

Auto A4 A4

A4 A4

10:10

Cancel OK

Plain Plain

GB0004_00

3-42

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Paper Output

Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Paper Output].

2Select the output destination.

Inner Tray*

* If the optional document finisher has been installed, [Inner Tray] will change to [Finisher Tray].

Places pages face down in the inner tray.

Finisher Tray* Places pages face down in the optional document finisher tray.

Job Separator Tray Places pages face down in the job separator tray.

NOTE

To change default destination, refer to Paper Output on page 9-13 for details.

Copy

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Inner tray

Off

Mixed Size Originals

Paper Output

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Paper Output

Inner tray

10:10

Cancel OK

Job Separator

Tray

GB0031_00

3-43

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Collate/Offset

Offset the output by page or set.

Collate

Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page

number.

Offset

Without Document Finisher (Option)

When you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or page) by 90°.

With Document Finisher (Option)

When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or after each

page).

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

NOTE

To offset without a document finisher, load the same size paper into a second paper source

with a different orientation.

The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.

Copy

Print from

USB

3-44

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Press [Collate/Offset].

2Select the function.

GB0001_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0021_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Collate/Offset

Off Collate Only Offset Each Page

Offset Each Set

10:10

Cancel OK

3-45

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Margin

Add margins (white space).

Margin Width

Margin on the Back Side

When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.

Auto

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin

specified for the front page and a binding orientation.

Manual

Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Margin].

Input units Margin Width

Inch Models -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric Models -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)

NOTE

You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin on page 9-12 for details.

Copy

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Saturation

10:10

Margin

Off

Continuous Scan

Auto Image Rotation

4/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-46

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Enter the margin width.

Press the text box and use [-]/[+] to enter a value.

3Specify the margin on the back side.

[Auto]

NOTE

[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Margin

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0038_00

Margin - Margin

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

L/R(-18 - +18)

Cancel

T/B(-18 - +18)

Margin - Settings

Margin

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Back Page

Original Orientation

< Back

1/1

Left: 6mm

Same as Front Page

Top Edge on Top

GB0040_00

GB0039_00

Margin - Settings

Margin

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Back Page

Original Orientation

< Back

1/1

Left: 6mm

Same as Front Page

Top Edge on Top

Margin - Back Page

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Manual

Auto

Cancel

1/1

GB0041_00

3-47

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

[Manual]

Press the text box and use [-]/[+] to enter a value.

4Select the original orientation.

NOTE

[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.

GB0041_00

GB0042_00

Margin - Back Page

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Manual

Auto

Cancel

1/1

Margin - Back Page

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

L/R(-18 - +18)

< Back

T/B(-18 - +18)

OKCancel

Margin - Original Orientation

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Top Edge on Left

Top Edge on Top

Cancel

1/1

GB0039_00

GB0015_01

Margin - Settings

Margin

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Back Page

Original Orientation

< Back

1/1

Left: 6mm

Same as Front Page

Top Edge on Top

3-48

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Staple

Staple documents. In addition, you can specify the staple position.

The following stapling options and orientations are available.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Staple].

NOTE

Stapling requires the document finisher.

Original Orientation:

Top Edge (Back Edge)

Original Orientation:

Left Top Edge (Left top corner)

Cassette Paper Load

Direction

Cassette Paper Load

Direction

Copy

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Staple

Off

10:10

Original Image

Text+Photo

Off

EcoPrint

Sharpness

2/4

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_05

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-49

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Select the staple position.

[1 staple] or [2 staples]

[Others]

2Select the staple position.

3Select the original orientation.

NOTE

[Original Orientation] is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory.

GB0032_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Staple

Off 1 staple 2 staples

2 staples Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Staple

Off 1 staple 2 staples

2 staples Others

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0032_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Staple - Staple

Off

10:10

1 staple (Top Left)

1 staple (Top Right)

2 staples (Left)

1/2

OKCancel

Staple - Others

Staple

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

< Back

1/1

Off

GB0033_00

GB0034_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Staple - Original Orientation

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Top Edge on Left

Top Edge on Top

Cancel

1/1

Staple - Others

Staple

10:10

Cancel

Original Orientation

< Back

1/1

2 staples (Right)

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0033_01

GB0015_02

3-50

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Density

Adjust density using 7 levels.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Adjust density.

Press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust density.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Copy Scan to USB

GB0001_01

GB0096_00

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

Send

GB0055_00

GB0081_02

Ready to send.

Functions

Density

Normal 0

10:10

Color Selection

Text+Photo

Original Image

Sharpness

3/6

Full Color

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Density

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Lighter

Cancel

Normal

-3

Darker

-2 -1 0+1 +2 +3

GB0008_00

3-51

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

The selectable resolution is [200×100dpi], [200×200dpi Fine], [200×400dpi Super], [300×300dpi], [400×400dpi Ultra], or

[600×600dpi].

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Select the resolution.

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

Send

Scan to

USB

Functions

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided

10:10

Sending Size

300x300dpi

Off

File Separation

Scan Resolution

2/6

Same as Original Size

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_01

Send

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Scan to USB

GB0096_00

Scan Resolution

600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra 300x300dpi

200x400dpi Super 200x200dpi Fine

10:10

Cancel OK

200x100dpi Normal

Ready to send.

GB0085_00

3-52

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Original Image].

2Select the image quality.

Text+Photo Best for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos.

Photo Best for photographs.

Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.

Graphic/Map*

* This function is displayed while copying.

Best for graphics and maps.

Printer Output* Best for documents printed on this machine originally.

Text (for OCR)**

** This function is displayed when the color mode is [Auto (Color/B & W)] or [Black & White] (when sending or storing).

For documents to be read by OCR.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Image

Text+Photo

10:10

EcoPrint

Off

Full Color

Color Selection

Hue Adjustment

2/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Original Image

Text+Photo Photo Text

Text (for OCR)

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to send.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Original Image

Text+Photo Photo Text

Graphic/Map

10:10

Cancel OK

Printer Output

GB0037_01

Copy Send/Scan to USB

GB0037_02

3-53

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Sharpness

Adjust the sharpness of the image.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

[Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear,

edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Blur].

* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Sharpness].

2Adjust the sharpness.

Press [-3] to [+3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original More SharpLess Sharp

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Color Balance

Off

10:10

Off

Sharpness

Background Density Adj.

3/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Prevent Bleed-through

Off

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Sharpness

10:10

Blur

Cancel

-3

Sharpen

-2 -1 0+1 +2 +3

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0060_00

3-54

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Background Density Adjust

Remove dark background from originals, such as newspapers. This feature is used with full

color and auto color. Background Density Adjust is disabled if Auto Color detects black and

white originals.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Background Density Adj.].

2Adjusts the background density.

[Auto]

[Manual]

Press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density.

Off Do not use this function.

Auto Adjusts the density automatically based on the original.

Manual Manually adjust the density.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Color Balance

Off

10:10

Off

Sharpness

Background Density Adj.

3/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Prevent Bleed-through

Off

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Background Density Adj.

Off Manual

10:10

Cancel OK

Auto

GB0061_00

Background Density Adj. - Settings

10:10

Lighter

< Back

Darker

2345

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0061_00

GB0062_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Background Density Adj.

Off Manual

10:10

Cancel OK

Auto

3-55

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Prevent Bleed-through

Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Prevent Bleed-through].

2Select the function.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Color Balance

Off

10:10

Off

Sharpness

Background Density Adj.

3/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Prevent Bleed-through

Off

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Prevent Bleed-through

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0835_00

3-56

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Zoom

Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size.

Refer to Sending Size on page 6-37 and Storing Size on page 7-14.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

Press [Functions] and then [Zoom].

2Select the function.

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Adjust the image to match the send or store size.

NOTE

Original Size (page 3-32), Sending Size (page 6-37), Storing Size (page 7-14), and Zoom are related to each other.

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to send.

Functions

Background Density Adj.

Off

10:10

Prevent Bleed-through

100%

200x100dpi Normal

FAX TX Resolution

Zoom

4/6

Off

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Zoom

100% Auto

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to send.

GB0087_00

3-57

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

File Format

Specify the image file format. In addition, you can adjust the image quality level.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

PDF Saves or sends a PDF file. You can specify the format that comply with PDF/A.

TIFF Saves or sends a TIFF file.

JPEG Saves or sends a JPEG file. Each page will be saved individually.

XPS Saves or sends a file in XPS.

Others File Format Select from PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS.

Image Quality Set the image quality from [1] to [5] (Low Quality - High Quality).

PDF/A*

* This setting is displayed only when [PDF] has been selected as the file format.

Set PDF/A from [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/A-1b].

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to send.

Functions

File Format

PDF

10:10

Original Size

Off

Top Edge on Top

Original Orientation

Mixed Size Originals

1/6

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Auto

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_00

Send

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Scan to USB

GB0096_00

3-58

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

2Select the file format.

[PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], or [XPS]

[Others]

2Select the file format.

3Set the image quality.

4Set PDF/A.

File Format

PDF TIFF JPEG

XPS Others

10:10

Cancel Next >

Ready to send.

GB0082_00

File Format

PDF TIFF JPEG

XPS Others

10:10

Cancel Next >

Ready to send.

File Format - File Format

PDF

10:10

TIFF

JPEG

XPS

1/1

OKCancel

Ready to send.

File Format - Others

File Format

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Image Quality

PDF/A

< Back

1/1

PDF

Off

GB0698_00

GB0145_00

File Format - Image Quality

10:10

Low Quality

Cancel

High Quality

2345

Ready to send.

GB0698_00

GB0083_00

File Format - Others

File Format

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Image Quality

PDF/A

< Back

1/1

PDF

Off

10:10

PDF/A-1a

PDF/A-1b

Off

Cancel

1/1

File Format - PDF/A

Ready to send.

GB0698_00

GB0699_00

File Format - Others

File Format

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Image Quality

PDF/A

< Back

1/1

PDF

Off

3-59

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Color Selection

Select the color mode setting.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Color Selection].

2Select the color mode.

Auto Color*

* This function is displayed while copying or printing.

Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black and white, and then scans the

document.

Auto (Color/Gray)**

** This function is displayed while sending or storing.

Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in

Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto (Color/B & W)** Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents

in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Grayscale** Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.

Black & White Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale.

Copy

Send Scan to

USB

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Image

Text+Photo

10:10

EcoPrint

Off

Full Color

Color Selection

Hue Adjustment

2/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to send.

Color Selection

Auto (Color/Gray) Auto (Color/B & W) Full Color

Grayscale Black & White

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0022_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Color Selection

Auto Color Full Color Black & White

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0022_00

3-60

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Job Finish Notice

Send e-mail notice when a job is complete.

User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside

the machine for copying to finish.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Job Finish Notice].

2Select the function.

3Select the destination.

Select an e-mail address from the address book.

NOTE

PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Email can be sent to a single destination.

Copy

Send Scan to

USB

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Job Finish Notice

Off

10:10

File Name Entry

doc

Off

Priority Override

5/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_04

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Job Finish Notice

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0063_00

Job Finish Notice - Destination

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

< BackCancel OK

1/1



GB0938_00

Allows you to add, edit, or delete a destination.

Job Finish ... - Address Book

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

AAA

1/1

aaa@abc.com

BBB bbb@abc.com

CCC ccc@abc.com

DDD ddd@abc.com

Cancel < Back

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Job Finish Notice - Settings

Address Book

10:10

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

My Address

1/1

Next >< BackCancel

GB0064_00

GB0398_00

Displays details for individual destinations.

Searches by destination name.

Allows you to search for and sort

destinations.

3-61

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Select the e-mail address from an external address book.

For details on the External Address Book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation

Guide.

Enter the e-mail address directly.

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

Uses the e-mail address of the logged in user.

This setting is displayed when using user login administration.

4Accept the destinations.

Press [OK].

GB0064_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Job Finish Notice - Settings

Address Book

10:10

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

My Address

1/1

Next >< BackCancel

GB0064_00

GB0057_05

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Job Finish Notice - Settings

Address Book

10:10

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

My Address

1/1

Next >< BackCancel

GB0064_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Job Finish Notice - Settings

Address Book

10:10

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

My Address

1/1

Next >< BackCancel

3-62

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

File Name Entry

Add a file name. Additional information such as Job No. and Date and Time can also be set. You

can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified

here.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Enter the name.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

3Add other information.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Job Finish Notice

Off

10:10

File Name Entry

doc

Off

Priority Override

5/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_04

Copy/Send

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Scan to USB

GB0096_00

GB0057_06

File Name Entry - Additional Info

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Date and Time

[Job No.]

[Job No.] & [Date and Time]

None

< BackCancel

1/2

GB0068_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

3-63

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

Priority Override

Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority. The suspended job resumes after the other job

is finished.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3-30, display the screen.

2Press [Functions] and then [Priority Override].

2Select the function.

NOTE

This function is not available if current job was an override.

Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.

Copy

Print from

USB

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Job Finish Notice

Off

10:10

File Name Entry

doc

Off

Priority Override

5/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_04

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0069_00

Priority Override

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

3-64

Common Operations > Using Various Functions

4-1

4 Copying

This chapter explains the following topics:

Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

Copying Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Zoom ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-5

Duplex ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-8

Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 4-12

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 4-15

Hue Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... 4-16

Color Balance ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17

Saturation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-18

Auto Image Rotation .............................................................................................................................. 4-19

Interrupt Copy .................................................................................................................................................. 4-20

4-2

Copying > Basic Operation

Basic Operation

1Press the Copy key

2Place the originals

For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.

3Selecting color mode

4Selecting the functions

Select the copier’s functions to use.

Press [Functions] to display other functions.

Refer to Copying Functions on page 4-4.

NOTE

If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the

Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is

color or black & white and then scans the

document.

Full Color Scans all documents in full color.

Black & White Scans all documents in black & white.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

4-3

Copying > Basic Operation

5Entering the copy quantity

6Start copying

Press the Start key to start copying.

NOTE

Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity.

4-4

Copying > Copying Functions

Copying Functions

Copy screen shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other selectable functions will be shown as

a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Specify the paper size and type. Paper Selection X page 3-41

Reduce or enlarge the original. Zoom X page 4-5

Adjust the density. Density X page 3-50

Copy on both sides of the paper. Duplex X page 4-8

Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet. Combine X page 4-12

Collate the output documents in page order.

Offset the output documents by set.

Collate/Offset X page 3-43

Specify the original size. Original Size X page 3-32

Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction. Original Orientation X page 3-34

Copy mixed size originals. Mixed Size Originals X page 3-35

Change the paper output. Paper Output X page 3-42

Staple in the output documents. Staple X page 3-48

Change the color mode. Color Selection X page 3-59

Select original image type for best results. Original Image X page 3-52

Save toner when printing. EcoPrint X page 4-15

Make a copy after changing the appearance of the original's colors. Hue Adjustment X page 4-16

Adjust colors, for example by strengthening cyan or magenta tones. Color Balance X page 4-17

Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.

Blur the image outline.

Sharpness X page 3-53

Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals. Background Density Adjust X

page 3-54

Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals. Prevent Bleed-through X page 3-55

Make a copy with more vivid colors. Saturation X page 4-18

Add margins (white space). Margin X page 3-45

Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job. Continuous Scan X page 3-39

Automatically rotate the scanned image to match the paper orientation. Auto Image Rotation X page 4-19

Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice X page 3-60

Add a file name to the job to easily check its status. File Name Entry X page 3-62

Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority. Priority Override X page 3-63

Pause the current jobs and make copies immediately. Interrupt Copy X page 4-20

4-5

Copying > Copying Functions

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Standard Zoom

Adjusts the image to match present sizes.

Model Zoom Level (Original

Copy)

Model Zoom Level (Original

Copy)

Inch Models Auto

400% (Max.)

200% (STMT >>Ledger)

154%(STMT >> Legal)

129% (Letter >> Ledger)

121% (Legal >> Ledger)

100%

78% (Legal >> Letter)

77% (Ledger >> Legal)

64% (Ledger >> Letter)

50% (Ledger >> STMT)

25% (Min.)

Metric Models Auto

400% (Max.)

200% (A5 >> A3)

141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4)

127% (Folio >> A3)

106% (11×15" >> A3)

100%

90% (Folio >> A4)

75% (11×15" >> A4)

70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5)

50%

25% (Min.)

Metric Models

(Asia Pacific)

Auto

400% (Max.)

200% (A5 >> A3)

141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4)

122% (A4 >> B4, A5 >> B5)

115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4)

100%

86% (A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5)

81% (B4 >> A4, B5 >> A5)

70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5)

50%

25% (Min.)

A3: 141%

A5: 70%

4-6

Copying > Copying Functions

Zoom Entry

Specify the image size in 1% increment between 25% - 400% of the original.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

[Auto]

[Standard Zoom]

Select the zoom level.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Zoom

100% Auto Standard Zoom

Zoom Entry

10:10

Cancel Next >

GB0005_00

Zoom - Standard Zoom

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

100%

86% A3>>B4 A4>>B5

81% B4>>A4 B5>>A5

115% B4>>A3 B5>>A4

< BackCancel

2/3

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Zoom

100% Auto Standard Zoom

Zoom Entry

10:10

Cancel Next >

GB0005_00

GB0006_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

4-7

Copying > Copying Functions

[Zoom Entry]

Enter the magnification.

Zoom - Zoom Entry

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

(25 - 400)

< Back

OKCancel

GB0007_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Zoom

100% Auto Standard Zoom

Zoom Entry

10:10

Cancel Next >

GB0005_00

4-8

Copying > Copying Functions

Duplex

Print 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the original binding

orientation and desired binding orientation.

1-sided>>1-sided Prints 1-sided to 1-sided.

1-sided>>2-sided Prints 1-sided to 2-sided.

2-sided>>1-sided Prints 2-sided to 1-sided.

2-sided>>2-sided Prints 2-sided to 2-sided.

Others Duplex 1-sided>>1-sided Prints 1-sided to 1-sided.

1-sided>>2-sided Prints 1-sided to 2-sided.

2-sided>>1-sided Prints 2-sided to 1-sided.

2-sided>>2-sided Prints 2-sided to 2-sided.

Book>>1-sided Prints open book originals to 1-sided.

Book>>2-sided Prints open book originals to 2-sided.

Binding in Original If you choose a 2-sided sheet original, select the binding

edge of the originals.

Binding in Finishing If you choose a 2-sided copy, select the binding edge of the

finished copies.

If you choose a 2-sided copy of a book, select the setting

for duplex.

Original Orientation*

* This item is not displayed when [1-sided>>1-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or [Book>>2-sided] is selected.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction.

4-9

Copying > Copying Functions

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

[1-sided>>1-sided], [1-sided>>2-sided], [2-sided>>1-sided], or [2-sided>>2-sided]

[Others]

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Executive, Statement-R,

Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio and 216 × 340 mm.

The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: Ledger, Letter-R,

Statement-R, A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.

The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-sided. Original:

Ledger, Letter-R, Statement-R, A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may change

paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Duplex

1-sided>>1-sided 1-sided>>2-sided 2-sided>>1-sided

2-sided>>2-sided Others

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0009_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Duplex

1-sided>>1-sided 1-sided>>2-sided 2-sided>>1-sided

2-sided>>2-sided Others

10:10

Cancel OK

4-10

Copying > Copying Functions

2Select the desired Duplex option.

If you choose a 2-sided sheet or book, proceed to Step 3. If you choose duplex, proceed to

Step 4. If you choose [Book >> 2-sided], proceed to Step 5.

3Select the binding edge of the originals.

4Select the binding edge of the finished copies.

5Select the binding edge of the finished copies.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Duplex - Duplex

1-sided>>1-sided

10:10

1-sided>>2-sided

2-sided>>1-sided

2-sided>>2-sided

1/2

OKCancel

Duplex - Duplex

Duplex

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

< Back

1/1

1-sided>>1-sided

GB0010_00GB0024_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Duplex - Binding in Original

Left/Right

10:10

Top

1/1

OKCancel

Duplex - Duplex

Duplex

10:10

Cancel

Binding in Original

< Back

1/1

2-sided>>2-sided

Left/Right

Binding in Finishing

Left/Right

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0010_01

GB0181_00

Duplex - Binding in Finishing

10:10

Top

Left/Right

Cancel

1/1

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Duplex - Duplex

Duplex

10:10

Cancel

Binding in Original

< Back

1/1

2-sided>>2-sided

Left/Right

Binding in Finishing

Left/Right

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0010_01

GB0012_00

Duplex - Binding in Finishing

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Book>>Book

Book>>2 sided

Cancel

1/1

Duplex - Duplex

Duplex

10:10

Cancel

Binding in Original

< Back

1/1

Book>>2-sided

Left

Binding in Finishing

Book>>2-sided

Original Orientation

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0010_02

GB0012_01

4-11

Copying > Copying Functions

6Select the original orientation.

Duplex - Original Orientation

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Top Edge on Left

Top Edge on Top

Cancel

1/1

Duplex - Duplex

Duplex

10:10

Cancel

Binding in Original

< Back

1/1

2-sided>>2-sided

Left/Right

Binding in Finishing

Left/Right

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0010_01

GB0015_03

4-12

Copying > Copying Functions

Combine

Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page. You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around

the pages.

2 in 1 Copies 2 originals onto each page.

4 in 1 Copies 4 originals onto each page.

Other

Settings

Combine 2 in 1 (L to R/T to B) Copies 2 originals onto each page.

2 in 1 (R to L/B to T)

4 in 1 (Right then Down) Copies 4 originals onto each page.

4 in 1 (Left then Down)

4 in 1 (Down then Right)

4 in 1 (Down then Left)

Border Line Sets the boundary line type to a solid line, dotted line, or

positioning mark.

Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction.

NOTE

Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.

When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

4-13

Copying > Copying Functions

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

[2 in 1] or [4 in 1]

[Others]

2Select the desired Combine option.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0016_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Combine

Off 2 in 1 4 in 1

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0016_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Combine

Off 2 in 1 4 in 1

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Combine - Combine

Off

10:10

2 in 1 (L to R/T to B)

2 in 1 (R to L/B to T)

4 in 1 (Right then Down)

1/2

OKCancel

Combine - Others

Combine

10:10

Cancel

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

< Back

1/1

Off

GB0017_00

GB0018_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

4-14

Copying > Copying Functions

3Sets the boundary line type.

4Select the original orientation.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Combine - Border Line

None

10:10

Solid Line

Dotted Line

Positioning Mark

1/1

OKCancel

Combine - Others

Combine

10:10

Cancel

Border Line

< Back

1/1

2 in 1 (L to R/T to B)

None

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0017_01

GB0019_00

Combine - Others

Combine

10:10

Cancel

Border Line

< Back

1/1

2 in 1 (L to R/T to B)

None

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

GB0017_01

GB0015_04

Combine - Original Orientation

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Top Edge on Left

Top Edge on Top

Cancel

1/1

4-15

Copying > Copying Functions

EcoPrint

Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print

is not required.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Image

Text+Photo

10:10

EcoPrint

Off

Full Color

Color Selection

Hue Adjustment

2/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0045_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

EcoPrint

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

4-16

Copying > Copying Functions

Hue Adjustment

Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong

green-yellow to make more creative copies.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Press [<] or [>] to make the adjustment.

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.

Adjust yellow to more green,

adjust blue to more magenta

Original

Adjust yellowish-red to more yellow,

adjust bluish-cyan to more blue

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Original Image

Text+Photo

10:10

EcoPrint

Off

Full Color

Color Selection

Hue Adjustment

2/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0047_00

Hue Adjustment

10:10

Average

Cancel

-3

Adjust

-2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

4-17

Copying > Copying Functions

Color Balance

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Press [<] or [>] on each side of the color to be adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to

adjust each color.

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

More MagentaOriginalLess Magenta

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Color Balance

Off

10:10

Off

Sharpness

Background Density Adj.

3/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Prevent Bleed-through

Off

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0058_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Color Balance

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0059_00

Color Balance - Settings

10:10Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Cancel OK< Back

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Black

4-18

Copying > Copying Functions

Saturation

Adjust the color saturation of the image.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Press [-3] or [+3] (Grayish - Vivid) to adjust the color saturation.

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

OriginalGrayish Vivid

Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Saturation

10:10

Margin

Off

Continuous Scan

Auto Image Rotation

4/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0070_00

Saturation

10:10

Grayish

Cancel

-3

Vivid

-2 -1 0

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

+1 +2 +3

4-19

Copying > Copying Functions

Auto Image Rotation

When original and paper source size are the same, but their orientation is different, rotate image 90 degrees.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 4-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Functions

Saturation

10:10

Margin

Off

Continuous Scan

Auto Image Rotation

4/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

GB0001_01

GB0002_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0044_00

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Auto Image Rotation

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

4-20

Copying > Interrupt Copy

Interrupt Copy

This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately. When

interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

1Press the Interrupt key.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2Make an interrupt copy.

1Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

2Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.

3End the interrupt copy.

When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt key. The machine resumes the paused print

jobs.

NOTE

If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and

printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the delay as required. For

more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9-24.

The interrupt copy function may be unavailable due to insufficient memory depending on the manner in which the

equipment is being utilized.

Ready for interrupt. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Collate/

Offset

1-sided>>1-sided

Auto 100% Normal 0

CollateOff

Functions

10:10

Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2

GB0001_99

5-1

5Printing

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printing from Applications .................................................................................................................................. 5-2

Printing Data Saved on the Printer ..................................................................................................................... 5-6

Private Print ............................................................................................................................................. 5-6

Proof and Hold ......................................................................................................................................... 5-8

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents .............................................................................. 5-11

5-2

Printing > Printing from Applications

Printing from Applications

This section provides basic instructions for printing documents. Instructions are based on interface elements as they

appear in Windows 7.

You can print documents created on your computer once you install the printer driver from the included DVD (Product

Library).

Refer to Installing Software on page 2-14.

For more information about how to configure advanced printer driver settings and print documents, refer to the Printer

Driver User Guide on the DVD.

1Display the window.

Click File and select Print in the application.

2Configure the printer.

1Select the printer.

2Click Properties button.

5-3

Printing > Printing from Applications

3Select the Basic tab.

4Click the Page Sizes button to select the paper size for the document data.

5Click Print size and select the paper size to use for printing.

6Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click OK button.

NOTE

Click the tabs on the print settings screen and configure the print settings as necessary. For

more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.

5-4

Printing > Printing from Applications

Printer driver print settings screen

The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. For more information,

refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD.

No. Description

1Quick Print

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it changes to an

image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

Basic

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, destination, duplex

printing, and color mode.

Layout

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster printing,

and scaling.

Finishing

This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and stapling.

Imaging

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and color mode of the print results.

Publishing

This tab lets you create cover sheets and insert and add OHP film for print jobs.

Job

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used documents and

other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the

machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.

Advanced

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data. It also provides simple color

adjustment functionality.

2Profiles

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a convenient practice to

save frequently used settings.

3Reset

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

5-5

Printing > Printing from Applications

Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn more about print settings, display the printer driver print settings screen and

display Help using either of the methods explained below.

• Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to

know about.

• Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

5-6

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Print data can be saved in the machine's Job Box and printed when needed.

Private Print

Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver.

For details, refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9-23.

1Display the screen.

2Select the creator of the document to print.

3Select the document.

NOTE

RAM disk mode must be enabled. RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed.

Document Box.

Box

Sub Address Box

Job Box Removable Memory

Polling Box

10:10

1/1

GB0051_00

GB0650_00

Job Box

10:10Document Box.

Proof and Hold

Private Print

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Document Box.

Job Box - Private Print

user 1

10:10

1/1

Next >< BackCancel

GB0651_00

Job Box - Private Print

10:10Document Box.

doc 0100908134821

doc 4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0653_01

Displays details for individual documents.

5-7

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

4Print and delete the document.

To print the document

Specify the number of copies to print as desired. When using the number of copies specified

with print job, select “---”.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

To delete

Select the document you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

NOTE

The password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

NOTE

The password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

Job Box - Private Print

10:10Document Box.

doc 0100908134821

doc 4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0653_01

Copies

10:10Document Box.

(1 - 999, ---)

Cancel

copy(s)

GB0003_00

Job Box - Private Print

10:10Document Box.

doc 0100908134821

doc 4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0653_01

5-8

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Proof and Hold

Proof and Hold stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver.

For details, refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9-23.

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs

To maintain free space on the RAM disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

1Display the screen.

2Enter the maximum number of stored jobs.

You can enter any number between 0 and 50.

NOTE

RAM disk mode must be enabled. RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed.

NOTE

If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use the Proof and Hold function.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Send

10:10

Document Box

FAX

Address Book/One Touch

3/5

Document Box

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Job Box

Polling Box

Sub Address Box

< Back

1/1

Quick Copy Job Retention

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Deletion of Job Retention

< Back

1/1

32job(s)

Off

Document Box - Job Box

GB0054_02

GB0290_00

GB0310_00

GB0311_00

Job Box - Quick Copy Job Retention

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(0 - 50)

Cancel

job(s)

5-9

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing and Deleting the Document

You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box.

1Display the screen.

2Select the creator of the document.

3Select the document.

4Print and delete the document.

To print the document

Specify the number of copies to print as desired. When using the number of copies specified

with print job, select “---”.

Document Box.

Box

Sub Address Box

Job Box Removable Memory

Polling Box

10:10

1/1

GB0051_00

GB0650_00

Job Box

10:10Document Box.

Proof and Hold

Private Print

Cancel

1/1

Next >

GB0652_00

Job Box - Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

user 1

< BackCancel

1/1

Next >

Job Box - Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

doc 100831170814

doc 100831170850

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

doc 100831170659

doc 100831170519

GB0654_00

Displays details for individual documents.

Job Box - Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

doc 100831170814

doc 100831170850

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

doc 100831170659

doc 100831170519

GB0654_00

GB0003_00

Copies

10:10Document Box.

(1 - 999, ---)

Cancel

copy(s)

5-10

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

To delete

Select the document you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

Job Box - Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

doc 100831170814

doc 100831170850

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

doc 100831170659

doc 100831170519

GB0654_00

5-11

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job

box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.

1Display the screen.

2Select the time.

Off Temporary documents are not automatically deleted. However, the temporary documents will be

deleted when the power is turned off.

1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour.

4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours.

1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day.

1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week.

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set.

Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Send

10:10

Document Box

FAX

Address Book/One Touch

3/5

Document Box

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Job Box

Polling Box

Sub Address Box

< Back

1/1

Quick Copy Job Retention

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Deletion of Job Retention

< Back

1/1

32job(s)

Off

Document Box - Job Box

GB0054_02

GB0290_00

GB0310_00

GB0312_00

Job Box - Deletion of Job Retention

10:10System Menu/Counter.

1 hour

4 hours

1 day

Off

Cancel

1/2

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

5-12

Printing > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

6-1

6 Sending

This chapter explains the following topics:

Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC .................................................................................................... 6-5

Checking What to Enter for [Host Name] ................................................................................................. 6-5

Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name] ....................................................................................... 6-6

Creating a Shared Folder ........................................................................................................................ 6-7

Checking the [Path] ............................................................................................................................... 6-10

Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) ...................................................................................... 6-11

Specifying Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 6-15

Choosing from the Address Book .......................................................................................................... 6-15

Choosing by One Touch Key ................................................................................................................. 6-17

Entering a New E-mail Address ............................................................................................................. 6-18

Specifying a New PC Folder .................................................................................................................. 6-19

Checking and Editing Destinations ........................................................................................................ 6-22

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ................................................................... 6-23

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 6-24

Adding a Contact ................................................................................................................................... 6-24

Adding a Group ...................................................................................................................................... 6-28

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ........................................................................................... 6-31

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ......................................................................................................... 6-33

Adding a Destination .............................................................................................................................. 6-33

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key ..................................................................................................... 6-35

Sending Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-36

Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-37

File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-39

E-mail Subject/Body .............................................................................................................................. 6-40

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-41

WSD Scan ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-42

Scanning using TWAIN .................................................................................................................................... 6-45

6-2

Sending > Basic Operation

Basic Operation

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

To use the transmission function, verify the following:

• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.

• Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP

server, and the recipient.

• Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.

• Create a share folder in the destination computer, when a folder (SMB/FTP) is selected as the destination.

Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings.

Basic Sending

Send as E-mail

Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. (page 6-18)

Send to Folder (SMB)

Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. (page 6-19)

Send to Folder (FTP)

Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. (page 6-19)

Image Data Scanning with TWAIN/WIA

Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. (page 6-45)

NOTE

Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi

Sending) on page 6-23.

The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. For details about this function, refer to the

FAX Operation Guide.

6-3

Sending > Basic Operation

1Press the Send key

2Place the originals

For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.

3Selecting color mode

To make more detailed settings, refer to Color Selection on page 3-59.

4Specifying destination

Select the destination to which to send an image.

For details, refer to Specifying Destination on page 6-15.

NOTE

If the touch panel is turned off, press the Energy Saver key or the

Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is

color or black & white and then scans the

document.

Full Color Scans all documents in full color.

Black & White Scans all documents in black & white.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

6-4

Sending > Basic Operation

5Selecting the functions

Press [Functions] to display the sending functions to use.

For details, refer to Sending Functions on page 6-36.

6Start sending

Press the Start key to start sending.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

6-5

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Checking What to Enter for [Host Name]

Check the name of the destination computer.

1Display the window.

From the Start menu, select Computer and then System Properties.

In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties

dialog box appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears.

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name in the window that appears.

If there is a workgroup

All characters appearing in "Full computer name" should be entered in [Host Name].

(Example: PC001)

If there is a domain

The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full computer name" should be entered in [Host

Name]. (Example: pc001)

After checking the computer name, click the (Close) button to close the System

Properties screen.

In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the Cancel button to close the

System Properties screen.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

6-6

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Checking What to Enter for [Login User Name]

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the window.

From the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Accessories and then Command

Prompt.

The Command Prompt window appears.

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Screen example: user name "james.smith" and domain name "ABCDNET"

6-7

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Creating a Shared Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

1Create a folder.

1Create a folder on the local disk (C).

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the local disk (C).

2Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing. Click the

Advanced Sharing button.

In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security... (or

Sharing).

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or

group.

1From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and

then Folder Options.

Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.

Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced

settings.

In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File

Sharing (Recommended) in Advanced settings.

6-8

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

2Configures permission settings.

In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click the Permissions button.

Enter the user name in the text box.

Click the [Location] button and select the desired location. To select the search target, click a

location to select it. When you are a member of a domain, your current domain will be set as

the search target by default.

6-9

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Select the entered user, select the Change and Read permissions.

In Windows XP, go to step 6.

5Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen.

In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then click the Add button.

7Proceed in the same way as in step 3 to add a user to Group or user names.

Select the added user, select the Modify and Read & execute permissions.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it

is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.

6-10

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Checking the [Path]

Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document.

1Display the window.

1Enter "\\pc001" in "Program and File Search" in the Start menu.

In Windows XP, click Search in the Start menu, select All files and folders, and search for

the destination computer to which the file will be sent.

In Search Companion, click Computers or people and then A computer on the network.

In the "Computer name:" text box, enter the name of the computer that you checked (pc001)

and then click Search.

2Click "\\pc001\scannerdata" that appears in the search results.

In Windows XP, double-click the computer ("pc001") that appears in the search results.

2Check the folder that appears.

1Check the address bar. The third and following text strings (X) should be entered for the

path.

In Windows XP, double-click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar. The text string

to the right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in Path.

(Example: scannerdata)

NOTE

You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be

sent. In this case, "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for

the Path. In the example window above, "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.

6-11

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Allow a program

through Windows Firewall.

Select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox.

2Add a port.

1From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security, and Check firewall

status.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.

6-12

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

6-13

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Select Specific local ports, and enter "139".

Make sure all checkboxes are selected.

6-14

Sending > Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC

Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.

In Windows XP or Windows Vista

1From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security (or Security Center),

and then Check Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall).

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.

2Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.

3Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.

Enter "139" in "Port Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".

4Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.

6-15

Sending > Specifying Destination

Specifying Destination

Select the destination to which to send an image.

Select the destination using either of the following methods.

•Choosing from the Address Book (page 6-15)

•Choosing by One Touch Key (page 6-17)

•Entering a New E-mail Address (page 6-18)

•Specifying a New PC Folder (page 6-19)

Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the destination.

Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations

are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.

NOTE

When the optional fax kit has been installed, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party’s number using

the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the

Address Book on page 6-24.

For details on the External Address Book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.

GB0055_00

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0426_00

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

< Back OKCancelMenu

1/1

003

004

001

Ready to send.

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-16

Sending > Specifying Destination

Destination Search

You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.

Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP),

FAX or Group).

Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.

Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.

3Accept the destinations.

Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.

NOTE

You may choose multiple destinations.

To cancel a selection, press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark.

GB0426_00

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

< Back OKCancelMenu

1/1

003

004

001

Ready to send.

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

Displays details for individual destinations.

Searches by destination name.

Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-

mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or Group).

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

< Back OKCancelMenu

1/1

003

004

001

Ready to send.

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

Narrow Down

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Search (Name)

Search(No.)

Sort (Name)

1/2

GB0396_00

GB0426_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0426_00

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

< Back OKCancelMenu

1/1

003

004

001

Ready to send.

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

6-17

Sending > Specifying Destination

Choosing by One Touch Key

Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the destination.

Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered. Multiple One Touch Keys can

be selected.

You can specify a one-touch key by one-touch number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

3Accept the destination.

Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.

NOTE

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6-33.

GB0055_00

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0095_00

One Touch Key

10:10Ready to send.

None

123456

Cancel

None

1/9

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0095_00

One Touch Key

10:10Ready to send.

None

123456

Cancel

None

1/9

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

6-18

Sending > Specifying Destination

Entering a New E-mail Address

Enter the desired e-mail address.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Enter destination E-mail address.

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to

100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing [Menu] and then

[Add to Address Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered

destination.

3Accept the destinations.

Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.

NOTE

Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For details, refer to

COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-23.

GB0055_00

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0057_07

6-19

Sending > Specifying Destination

Specifying a New PC Folder

Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the folder type.

3Enter the destination information.

Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, press [Next] to advance to the

next item.

For send to folder (SMB)

NOTE

Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 6-7 for details on how to share a folder.

Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND

CENTER Operation Guide.

Item Data to be entered Max. characters

Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive

the data.

Up to 64 characters

Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows.

For example, \User\ScanData.

Up to 128 characters

GB0055_00

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0103_00

Folder

10:10Ready to send.

FTP Path Entry

SMB Path Entry

Cancel

1/1

Next >

GB0057_08

6-20

Sending > Specifying Destination

For send to folder (FTP)

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

4Confirm the information.

Check the information. Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question.

When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination, press [Port] and enter

the port number. You can enter a number from 1 to 65,535 with a maximum of 5 digits.

Confirm the connection status.

Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot

connect. appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, press [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. You can

specify a combined total of up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing [Menu] and then

[Add to Address Book].

Domain name/User name

For example, abcdnet\james.smith.

User name@Domain name

For example, james.smith@abcdnet

Up to 64 characters

Item Data to be entered Max. characters

Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters

Path Path to the receiving folder.

For example, \User\ScanData.

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home

directory.

Up to 128 characters

Item Data to be entered Max. characters

GB0128_00

Folder - Confirmation

abc

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

abc

139

< Back

1/2

abc

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Connection Test

10:10

Next Destination

Add to Address Book

1/1

Folder - Confirmation

abc

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

abc

139

< Back

1/2

abc

GB0128_00

GB0020_00

6-21

Sending > Specifying Destination

5Accept the destinations.

Destinations can be changed later. Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6-22.

GB0128_00

Folder - Confirmation

abc

10:10

Cancel

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

abc

139

< Back

1/2

abc

6-22

Sending > Specifying Destination

Checking and Editing Destinations

Check and edit a selected destination.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6-15, specify the destination.

2Check and edit the destination.

GB0055_02

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

BBB bbb@abc.com Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Check

10:10Ready to send.

BBB

AAA

1/1

End

bbb@abc.com

abcdefg

Deletes the selected destination.

Adds a new destination.

Displays details for the destinations. New E-mail addresses and PC

folders can be edited if they have been specified.

GB0105_00

Scrolls up and down when the list of

destinations cannot be displayed in its

entirety on a single screen.

6-23

Sending > Specifying Destination

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers*. This is referred to

as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single

operation.

* Requires the optional fax kit.

No. of broadcast items

E-mail: Up to 100

Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP

FAX: Up to 100

Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

6-24

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Adding a Contact

A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination

name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).

1Display the screen.

2Adds a new destination.

3Select the registration method.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with

administrator privileges.

Contact addresses can also be registered in the system menu.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

Address Book (All)

10:10Ready to send.

1/1

001

002

< Back OKMenu Cancel

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

GB0426_01

GB0055_00

GB0396_01

Sort (No.)

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Add

Edit

Delete

2/2

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0419_01

Add - Address Type

10:10Select the address type.

Group

Contact

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/1

㪥㪼㫏㫋㩷㪕

6-25

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Enter the destination name.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

5Enter the address number.

Press [+], [-] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-250).

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200

numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups.

If you set “000” as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available

number.

6Enter the destination.

Select the type of destination to register.

For details on FAX, refer to FAX Operation Guide.

E-mail Address

Enter the E-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.

GB0057_11

Address Number

10:10Ready to send.

(000 - 250)

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃㪦㪢

Add - Confirmation

Sales department 1

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Select the item that you want to change.

Address Number

FAX

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

E-mail Address

GB0078_02

GB0217_01

Add - Confirmation

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Select the item that you want to change.

SMB

FTP

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

2/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

GB0078_02

Add - Confirmation

Sales department 1

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Select the item that you want to change.

Address Number

FAX

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

E-mail Address

GB0078_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0057_13

6-26

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

The Folder (SMB) Address

1Enter Host Name, Path, Port, Login User Name and Login Password.

For more information, refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6-19.

2Confirm the connection status.

Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot

connect. appears, review the entry.

The Folder (FTP) Address

1Enter Host Name, Path, Port, Login User Name and Login Password.

For more information, refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6-19.

SMB

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

139

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

GB0705_02

GB0057_15

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Connection Test

10:10

1/1

SMB

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

139

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

abc

GB0705_03

GB0696_00

SMB

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

139

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

abc

GB0705_03

FTP

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

GB0709_02

GB0057_15

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-27

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

2Confirm the connection status.

Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot

connect. appears, review the entry.

7Register the destination.

Connection Test

10:10

1/1

FTP

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

abc

GB0709_03

GB0696_00

FTP

10:10

㪤㪼㫅㫌

Ready to send.

Path

Port

Host Name

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/2

㪦㪢

abc

GB0709_03

GB0078_02

Add - Confirmation

Sales department 1

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Select the item that you want to change.

Address Number

FAX

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

E-mail Address

6-28

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a

group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.

Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added first.

1Display the screen.

2Adds a new destination.

3Select the registration method.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with

administrator privileges.

Designations in the group can also be registered in the system menu.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

Address Book (All)

10:10Ready to send.

1/1

001

002

< Back OKMenu Cancel

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

GB0426_01

GB0055_00

GB0396_01

Sort (No.)

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Add

Edit

Delete

2/2

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0419_01

Add - Address Type

10:10Select the address type.

Group

Contact

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

1/1

㪥㪼㫏㫋㩷㪕

6-29

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Enter the group name.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

5Enter the address number.

Press [+], [-] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-250).

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200

numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups.

If you set “000” as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available

number.

6Select the members (destinations).

1Display the screen.

2Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected

destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.

You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

GB0057_16

Address Number

10:10Ready to send.

(000 - 250)

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃㪦㪢

Add - Confirmation

Support department

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

Member

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/1

㪪㪸㫍㪼

Member:0

GB0420_02

GB0217_01

Member

10:10Ready to send.

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/1

㪜㫅㪻

Add - Confirmation

Support department

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

Member

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/1

㪪㪸㫍㪼

Member:0

GB0420_02

GB0114_03

Address Book (Contact)

10:10Ready to send.

1/2

001 Sales department 1 0123456

001 Sales department 1 abc

002 Support department 0234567

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃㪦㪢㪤㪼㫅㫌

002 Support department .BOX

GB0428_01

Displays details for individual destinations.

Searches by destination name.

Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-

mail, Folder (SMB/FTP) or FAX).

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-30

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.

Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP)

or FAX).

Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.

Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.

7Accept the members.

8Register the group.

NOTE

To cancel a selection, press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark.

Narrow Down

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Search (Name)

Search(No.)

Sort (Name)

1/2

GB0396_00

Address Book (Contact)

10:10Ready to send.

1/2

001 Sales department 1 0123456

001 Sales department 1 abc

002 Support department 0234567

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃㪦㪢㪤㪼㫅㫌

002 Support department .BOX

GB0428_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Member

10:10Ready to send.

Sales department 1

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/1

㪜㫅㪻

0123456

Support department 0234567

GB0428_01

Address Book (Contact)

10:10Ready to send.

1/2

001 Sales department 1 0123456

001 Sales department 1 abc

002 Support department 0234567

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃㪦㪢㪤㪼㫅㫌

002 Support department .BOX

GB0114_04

GB0420_03

Add - Confirmation

Support department

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

Member

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/1

㪪㪸㫍㪼

Member:2

6-31

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries

Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

2Edit or delete the destination.

To edit the destination

Select the destination (contacts) or group to edit.

You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

Address Book (All)

10:10Ready to send.

1/1

001

002

< Back OKMenu Cancel

Sales department 1

Support department

0123456

abc

0234567

.BOX

GB0426_01

GB0055_00

GB0396_01

Sort (No.)

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Add

Edit

Delete

2/2

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0785_00

Address Book (All)

10:10Ready to send.

Sales department 1

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/2

㪥㪼㫏㫋㩷㪕

Support department

SYSTEM DEP.

Sales department 1 Member:2

019

002

001

003

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

GB0786_00

Edit - Confirm

Sales department 1

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

FAX

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

E-mail Address

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-32

Sending > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

To delete a member (group)

To delete a member from a group, select the destination you wish to delete and press

[(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

To delete

Select the destination (contacts) or group to delete.

GB0786_00

Edit - Confirm

Sales department 1

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

FAX

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/2

㪪㪸㫍㪼

E-mail Address

Member

10:10Ready to send.

Sales department 1

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/1

㪜㫅㪻

0123456

Support department 0234567

Edit - Confirm

Support department

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

Member

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/1

㪪㪸㫍㪼

Member:2

GB0787_00

GB0114_04

Edit - Confirm

Support department

10:10

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

Ready to send.

Address Number

Member

Name

Auto

㪓㩷㪙㪸㪺㫂

1/1

㪪㪸㫍㪼

Member:1

Member

10:10Ready to send.

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/1

㪜㫅㪻

Support department 0234567

GB0114_05

GB0787_01

GB0396_01

Sort (No.)

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Add

Edit

Delete

2/2

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0788_00

Address Book (All)

10:10Ready to send.

Sales department 1

㪤㪼㫅㫌

1/2

㪛㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼

Support department

SYSTEM DEP.

Sales department 1 Member:2

019

002

001

003

㪚㪸㫅㪺㪼㫃

6-33

Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Add a new destination (contact or group) on One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination

Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered.

To register a destination to a One Touch Key, it must first be registered in the Address Book. Register one or more

destinations as needed before proceeding.

1Display the screen.

2Add a One-Touch Key.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and press [+].

3Select the destinations.

Select one destination (contact or group) from the Address Book.

You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Send

10:10

Document Box

FAX

Address Book/One Touch

3/5

Address Book

10:10System Menu/Counter.

One Touch Key

< Back

1/1

Address Book Defaults

Print List

Address Book/One Touch

GB0411_00

GB0054_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

None

Cancel

None

1/9

End

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

GB0422_00

Address Book (All)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department 1

1/2

Next >

0123456

Sales department 1 abc

Support department 0234567

Support department .BOX

Cancel < Back

GB0429_00

Displays details for individual destinations.

Searches by destination name.

Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-

mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or Group).

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-34

Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

You can also press [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.

Narrow Down: Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP),

FAX or Group).

Search (Name) and Search (No.): Searches by destination name or address number.

Sort (Name) and Sort (No.): Sorts the list by destination name or address number.

4Enter the One Touch Key name.

Up to 24 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

5Register the destination.

Address Book (All)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department 1

1/2

Next >

0123456

Sales department 1 abc

Support department 0234567

Support department .BOX

Cancel < Back

Narrow Down

10:10

㪚㫃㫆㫊㪼

Search (Name)

Search(No.)

Sort (Name)

1/2

GB0396_00

GB0429_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0057_18

Address Book (All)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department 1

1/2

Next >

0123456

Sales department 1 abc

Support department 0234567

Support department .BOX

Cancel < Back

GB0429_00

GB0754_00

Add - Confirmation

Sales department 1

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

FAX Number

Sub Address

TX Start Speed

Name

0123456

33600bps

< Back

1/2

Save

6-35

Sending > Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key

Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

1Display the screen.

2Edit or delete the destination.

To edit the destination

Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press [Menu] followed by [Edit].

To delete

Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Send

10:10

Document Box

FAX

Address Book/One Touch

3/5

Address Book

10:10System Menu/Counter.

One Touch Key

< Back

1/1

Address Book Defaults

Print List

Address Book/One Touch

GB0411_00

GB0054_02

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

10:10

Edit

1/1

Delete

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

None

Sales

department 1

None

1/9

End

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

GB0422_01

GB0430_00

GB0422_01

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

None

Sales

department 1

None

1/9

End

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

6-36

Sending > Sending Functions

Sending Functions

Send screen shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other selectable functions will be shown as

a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Select the file format for images being sent. File Format X page 3-57

Specify the original size. Original Size X page 3-32

Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction. Original Orientation X page 3-34

Send mixed size originals. Mixed Size Originals X page 3-35

Automatically scan 2-sided originals. 2-sided/Book Original X page 3-37

Change the size of the image being sent. Sending Size X page 6-37

Send each page in a separate file. File Separation X page 6-39

Set the resolution at which to scan originals. Scan Resolution X page 3-51

Adjust the density. Density X page 3-50

Change the color mode for images being sent. Color Selection X page 3-59

Select original image type for best results. Original Image X page 3-52

Emphasize the outline of texts or lines.

Blur the image outline.

Sharpness X page 3-53

Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals. Background Density Adjust X

page 3-54

Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals. Prevent Bleed-through X page 3-55

Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size. Zoom X page 3-56

Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job. Continuous Scan X page 3-39

Add a file name to the job to easily check its status. File Name Entry X page 3-62

Add an E-mail subject and body (when sending E-mail). E-mail Subject/Body X page 6-40

Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice X page 3-60

Encrypt your message. FTP Encrypted TX X page 6-41

Send a image to a WSD-compatible computer. WSD Scan X page 6-42

NOTE

This section does not include fax settings. For details on fax operation, refer to the FAX Operation Guide. Fax

functionality requires the optional fax kit.

6-37

Sending > Sending Functions

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 3-32), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 3-56) are related to each other. Refer to the following table.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the sending size.

[Same as Original Size]

Same as Original Size Automatically sends the same size as the original.

Metric Select from A3, A4, A5, A5-R, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.

inch Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15", or Oficio II.

Others Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki,

Original Size and the size you wish to

send as are

the same different

Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary

Sending Size Select [Same as Original] Select the required size

Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]) Select [Auto]

NOTE

When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the

image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Functions

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided

10:10

Sending Size

300x300dpi

Off

File Separation

Scan Resolution

2/6

Same as Original Size

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0071_00

Ready to send.

Sending Size

Same as

Original Size

Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

6-38

Sending > Sending Functions

[Metric], [inch] or [Others]

Select the desired size.

Sending Size - Metric

10:10Ready to send.

< BackCancel

1/3

Ready to send.

Sending Size

Same as

Original Size

Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0071_00

GB0072_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

6-39

Sending > Sending Functions

File Separation

Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

NOTE

Three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file name.

Functions

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided

10:10

Sending Size

300x300dpi

Off

File Separation

Scan Resolution

2/6

Same as Original Size

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0084_00

Ready to send.

File Separation

Off Each Page

10:10

Cancel OK

6-40

Sending > Sending Functions

E-mail Subject/Body

Add subject and body when sending a document.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Enter the subject.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

3Enter the body.

4Press [OK].

NOTE

The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

Functions

Continuous Scan

Off

10:10

File Name Entry

Off

E-mail Subject/Body

Job Finish Notice

5/6

doc

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_04

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

E-mail Subject/Body

10:10

Subject

Body

Cancel

Ready to send.

GB0088_00

GB0057_19

E-mail Subject/Body

Subject Meeting

10:10

Cancel OK

Body

Ready to send.

GB0088_01

GB0057_20

6-41

Sending > Sending Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypt images when using FTP. Encryption secures the document transmission.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Basic Operation on page 6-2, display the screen.

2Select the function.

NOTE

To use FTP encryption, set SSL to [On] in the Secure Protocol settings. For details, refer to Secure Protocol on page

9-22.

Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

10:10

FAX Delayed Transmission

Off

FAX Direct Transmission

FAX Polling RX

6/6

Off

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to send.

Off

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0081_05

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0091_00

FTP Encrypted TX

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to send.

6-42

Sending > WSD Scan

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)

1Display the window.

From the Start menu, select Network.

2Install the driver.

Right-click the machine’s icon and then click Install.

During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver

Software Installation screen. When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the

screen, the installation is completed.

Using WSD

1Press the Send key.

2Place the originals.

For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.

NOTE

To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

WSD Scan (page 9-21) is set to [On] in the network settings.

For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.

NOTE

If the User Account Control window appears, click Continue.

If the Found New Hardware window appears, click Cancel.

6-43

Sending > WSD Scan

3Display the screen.

4Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

2Select the destination computer.

3Press the Start key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

WSD Scan

Functions

10:10

2/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_01

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send.

GB0055_00

GB0648_00

WSD Scan

10:10Ready to send.

From Operation Panel

From Computer

Cancel

1/1

GB0649_00

WSD Scan - PC

10:10

PC 2

PC 3

PC 1

< Back

1/1

OKCancelReload

Ready to send.

Displays information for individual destination computers.

Updates the list.

6-44

Sending > WSD Scan

Procedure from Your Computer

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

GB0648_00

WSD Scan

10:10Ready to send.

From Operation Panel

From Computer

Cancel

1/1

6-45

Sending > Scanning using TWAIN

Scanning using TWAIN

This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN.

The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the same

way.

1Display the window.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application.

2Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box.

2Configure the function.

Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens.

The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.

Item Detail

Original

Configurations

Original Size Select the scan size of the original.

Original

Orientation

Specify the type of binding.

Send

Configurations

Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided.

Image Quality

Settings

Color Settings Select the color mode.

Resolution Select the resolution.

Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original.

Image

Adjustment

Density Select the exposure.

Select the Auto button to have the exposure set

automatically based on the original.

Prevent Bleed-

through

Hide background colors and image bleed-through when

scanning thin original.

6-46

Sending > Scanning using TWAIN

3Place the originals.

For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.

4Scan the originals.

Click the Scan button. The document data is scanned.

Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently

used settings. When the Configuration button is clicked,

a setting screen opens with buttons for Details, Add

current configuration, and Delete selected

configuration.

Details Current settings can be checked.

Add current

configuration

Save current settings with a name and comment.

Delete selected

configuration

Delete saved settings.

Item Detail

7-1

7 Document Box

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ................................................................................... 7-2

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ........................................................................................... 7-5

Removing USB Memory .................................................................................................................................... 7-8

Functions for Document Box .............................................................................................................................. 7-9

Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 7-10

Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................................................... 7-11

JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 7-12

XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 7-13

Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 7-14

7-2

Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.5)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.

Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error

free if a USB hub is used.

1Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).

When the message Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure? is

displayed, press [Yes].

Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.

IMPORTANT

Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other

device is used, The removable memory is not formatted. may appear.

7-3

Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

2Display the screen.

1When the machine reads the USB memory, Removable Memory screen may appear.

2Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored.

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder. To

return to a higher level folder, press [< Back].

3Select the file.

Select the file to be printed and press [Print].

4Enter the quantity.

NOTE

If the screen does not appear, press the Document Box key and then [Removable

Memory].

NOTE

Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity.

GB0089_00

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

DEF

GHI

JKL

ABC

Cancel PrintMenu

1/25

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

7-9-2.JPG

11-3-3.JPG

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0089_03

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

7-9-2.JPG

11-3-3.JPG

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0089_02

Displays details for individual files.

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

GB0097_00

7-4

Document Box > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

5Select the functions.

Select the function to use for Document Box.

Press [Functions] to display other functions.

For details, refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7-9.

6Start printing.

Press the Start key to start printing.

Remove the USB memory.

For details, refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.

GB0097_00

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

7-5

Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in

PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.

1Place the originals.

For details, refer to Loading Originals on page 3-7.

2Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).

When the message Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure? is

displayed, press [Yes].

Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.

IMPORTANT

Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other

device is used, The removable memory is not formatted. may appear.

7-6

Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

3Display the screen.

When the machine reads the USB memory, Removable Memory screen may appear.

4Select the folder.

Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Menu] and then [Store File].

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder. To return to a higher

level folder, press [< Back].

5Select the functions.

Select the function to use for Document Box.

Press [Functions] to display other functions.

NOTE

If the screen does not appear, press the Document Box key and then [Removable

Memory].

NOTE

Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory. If the number of

documents and folders in a directory exceeds 100, you will be unable to save additional

documents.

GB0089_00

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

DEF

GHI

JKL

ABC

Cancel PrintMenu

1/25

Store File

10:10

Document Box.

Delete

Select All

1/3

GB0089_00

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

DEF

GHI

JKL

ABC

Cancel PrintMenu

1/25

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

7-9-2.JPG

11-3-3.JPG

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

GB0089_03

GB0107_00

GB0096_00

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

7-7

Document Box > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

For details, refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7-9.

6Start storing.

Press the Start key to start storing.

Remove the USB memory.

For details, refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.

7-8

Document Box > Removing USB Memory

Removing USB Memory

Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed.

1Display the screen.

2Select [Remove Memory].

3Remove the USB memory.

After Removable Memory can be safely removed. is displayed, press [OK] and remove the

USB memory.

For details, refer to Check of Device Status on page 8-11.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Document Box.

Box

Sub Address Box

Job Box Removable Memory

Polling Box

10:10

1/1

GB0051_00

Clear All

10:10Document Box.

Remove Memory

Sort (Name)

Sort (Date and Time)

2/3

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

DEF

GHI

JKL

ABC

Cancel PrintMenu

1/25

GB0089_00

GB0107_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

7-9

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

Functions for Document Box

Print or Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions. By pressing [Functions], other

selectable functions will be shown as a list. Use [ ] or [ ] to select the function.

When printing from USB memory

When storing a document to USB memory

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Specify the paper size and type. Paper Selection X page 3-41

Collate the output documents in page order. / Offset the output documents by set. Collate/Offset X page 3-43

Print on both sides of the paper. Duplex X page 7-10

Change the paper output. Paper Output X page 3-42

Staple in the output documents. Staple X page 3-48

Change the color mode. Color Selection X page 3-59

Add margins (white space). Margin X page 3-45

Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice X page 3-60

Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority. Priority Override X page 3-63

Password-protect a PDF file. Encrypted PDF Password X page 7-11

Set the image size (resolution) when printing a JPEG or TIFF file. JPEG/TIFF Print X page 7-12

Print an XPS file so that it fits the paper size. XPS Fit to Page X page 7-13

What do you want to do? Reference Page

Select the file format for images being stored. File Format X page 3-57

Automatically scan 2-sided originals. 2-sided/Book Original X page 3-37

Set the resolution at which to scan originals. Scan Resolution X page 3-51

Adjust the density. Density X page 3-50

Add a file name to the job to easily check its status. File Name Entry X page 3-62

Specify the original size. Original Size X page 3-32

Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction. Original Orientation X page 3-34

Scan mixed size originals. Mixed Size Originals X page 3-35

Change the size at which to store an image Storing Size X page 7-14

Change the color mode for images being stored. Color Selection X page 3-59

Select original image type for best results. Original Image X page 3-52

Emphasize the outline of texts or lines. / Blur the image outline. Sharpness X page 3-53

Darken or lighten the background (i.e., the area with no text or images) of originals. Background Density Adjust X page 3-54

Prevent bleed-through for 2-sided originals. Prevent Bleed-through X page 3-55

Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size. Zoom X page 3-56

Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job. Continuous Scan X page 3-39

Send notice by e-mail when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice X page 3-60

7-10

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

Duplex

Print a document 1-sided or 2-sided. Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display

the screen.

2Select the function.

2-sided Print a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right

2-sided Print a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top.

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

GB0097_00

Ready to print from Box.

Duplex

1-sided 2-sided 2-sided

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0065_00

7-11

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

Encrypted PDF Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display

the screen.

2Enter the password.

Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

Ready to print from Box.

Functions

Encrypted PDF Password

Off

10:10

JPEG/TIFF Print

Paper Size

Off

XPS Fit to Page

2/2

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

GB0097_00

GB0099_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0057_21

7-12

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display

the screen.

2Select the function.

Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution.

Ready to print from Box.

Functions

Encrypted PDF Password

Off

10:10

JPEG/TIFF Print

Paper Size

Off

XPS Fit to Page

2/2

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0097_00

GB0099_01

GB0101_00

Ready to print from Box.

JPEG/TIFF Print

Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution

10:10

Cancel OK

7-13

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7-2, display

the screen.

2Select the function.

Ready to print from Box.

Functions

Encrypted PDF Password

Off

10:10

JPEG/TIFF Print

Paper Size

Off

XPS Fit to Page

2/2

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate/

Offset

Duplex

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Collate 1-sided

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0097_00

GB0099_01

GB0102_00

Ready to print from Box.

XPS Fit to Page

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

7-14

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 3-32), Storing Size, and Zoom (page 3-56) are related to each other. Refer to the following table.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) on page 7-5, display the

screen.

2Select the storing size.

[Same as Original Size]

Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original.

Metric Select from A3, A4, A5, A5-R, B4, B5, B6, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.

inch Select from Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11 × 15" or Oficio II.

Others Select from 8K, 16K, Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki,

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are

the same different

Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary

Storing Size Select [Same as Original] Select the required size

Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]) Select [Auto]

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

Ready to store in Box.

Functions

Original Size

Auto

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Same as Original Size

Storing Size

1/3

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Mixed Size Originals

Off

Ready to store in Box.

Store File

File

Format

2-sided/

Book

Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

GB0096_00

GB0098_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0132_00

Ready to store in Box.

Storing Size

Same as

Original Size

Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

7-15

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

[Metric], [inch] or [Others]

Select the desired size.

Storing Size - Metric

10:10Ready to store in Box.

< BackCancel

1/3

Ready to store in Box.

Storing Size

Same as

Original Size

Metric Inch

Others

10:10

Cancel OK

GB0132_01

GB0133_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

7-16

Document Box > Functions for Document Box

8-1

8 Status / Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 8-3

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 8-6

Sending the Log History ..................................................................................................................................... 8-7

Setting the Destination ............................................................................................................................. 8-8

Automatic Log History Transmission ....................................................................................................... 8-9

Manual Log History Transmission ............................................................................................................ 8-9

Setting E-mail Subject ........................................................................................................................... 8-10

Check of Device Status ..................................................................................................................................... 8-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ..................................................................................... 8-13

8-2

Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing

Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs. The following job statuses are available.

1Display the screen.

Press either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] to

check the status.

2Check the status.

Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8-3, Send Job Status screen on page 8-4, Store Job

Status screen on page 8-5, and Scheduled Job screen on page 8-5.

Print Job Status Copy

Printer

Printing from Document Box

FAX reception

E-mail reception

Job Report /List

Printing data from removable memory

Send Job Status FAX transmission

Folder (SMB/FTP) transmission

E-mail

Application

Mixed (Multiple destination)

Store Job Status Scan

FAX

Printer

Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Print Job Status

10:10

Send Job Status

Store Job Status

Scheduled Job

Pause All

Print Jobs

1/4

GB0052_00

Print Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000892010092514...

Cancel Close

5/23

1/1

0089

Pause All

Print Jobs

GB0182_00

8-3

Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Job Status Screen

No. Item/Key Detail

1—Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job

Job from Document Box

FAX reception

E-mail reception

Report/List

Data from removable memory

2[Cancel] Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.

3[...] Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

4[Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing jobs will be resumed.

5—Status of job

Printing

Printing (priority override)

Printing (interrupt copying)

Print Waiting

Print Waiting (priority override)

Print Waiting (interrupt copying)

Pausing print job or error

Canceling the job

The status before starting to print.

The status before starting to print. (priority override)

The status before starting to print. (interrupt copying)

Printing has been suspended due to priority override or interrupt copy operation.

6[Close] Closes the Print Job Status screen.

Print Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000892010092514...

Cancel Close

5/23

1/1

0089

Pause All

Print Jobs

GB0182_00

124 6

8-4

Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Job Status screen

No. Display/Key Detail

1—Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

Sending Job E-mail

Sending Job Application

Sending Job Mixed (Multiple)

2[Menu]*

* This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed.

Pressing this key displays [Priority Override]. This function allows you to give a particular fax

job priority.

Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press [Menu], followed by [Priority

Override].

3[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

4[...] Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

5—Status of job

Sending

Sending Waiting

A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start.

Pausing the job or error

Canceling the job

The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals

6[Close] Closes the Send Job Status screen.

Send Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

0123456

Cancel CloseMenu

Process

1/1

0005

GB0183_00

1362

8-5

Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status screen

Scheduled Job screen

No. Display/Key Details

1—Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Printer

Storing Job FAX

2[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

3[...] Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

4—Status of job

Storing Data

Pausing the job or error

Canceling the job

The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals

5[Close] Closes the Store Job Status screen.

No. Display/Key Details

1—Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

2[Menu] Pressing this key displays [Start Now]. Select the job you wish to send immediately and then

press [Menu], followed by [Start Now].

3[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

4[...] Press […] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

5—Status of job

Sending Waiting

6[Close] Closes the Scheduled Job screen.

Store Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000162010082913...

Cancel Close

Storing

1/1

0016

GB0184_00

125

Scheduled Job

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

1233

Cancel Close

04:00

1/1

0014

GB0185_00

1362

8-6

Status / Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The

following job histories are available.

1Display the screen.

Press either of [Print Job Log], [Send Job Log], or [Store Job Log] to check the log.

2Check the log.

Press [Close] to exit the screen.

For details, refer to Sending the Log History on page 8-7.

Print Job Log Copy

Printer

FAX reception

E-mail reception

Printing from Document Box

Job Report/List

Printing data from removable

memory

Send Job Log FAX

Folder (SMB/FTP)

E-mail

Application

Mixed (Multiple destination)

Store Job Log Scan

FAX

Printer

NOTE

The job history can be sent by E-mail.

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Print Job Log

10:10

Send Job Log

Store Job Log

Scanner

Pause All

Print Jobs

2/4

Waiting

GB0052_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0186_00

Print Job Log

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000112010081817...

Completed

1/3

0011

doc0000102010081815... Canceled0010

doc0000092010081815... Completed0009

doc Error0008

Displays details for individual jobs.

8-7

Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

1Display the screen.

2Configure the function.

Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8-8, Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8-9,

Manual Log History Transmission on page 8-9 and Setting E-mail Subject on page 8-10.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Quick Setup Wizard

10:10

Language

Report

Counter

1/5

Report Print

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin Report Settings

< Back

1/1

Result Report Setting

Sending Log History

Report

GB0054_00

GB0560_00

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

GB0723_00

Send Log History

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Auto Sending

< Back

1/1

Off

Destination

E-mail:

Report - Sending Log History

Job Log Subject

GB0578_00

8-8

Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History

Setting the Destination

Set the destination to which log histories are sent.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.

2Select the destination.

Select from the Address Book.

Enter a new e-mail address.

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

3Accept the destination.

Sending Log History - Destination

10:10System Menu/Counter.

1/1

OKCancel

GB0578_00

GB0581_00

Send Log History

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Auto Sending

< Back

1/1

Off

Destination

E-mail:

Report - Sending Log History

Job Log Subject

Add - Address Book

10:10System Menu/Counter.

AAA

1/1

aaa@abc.com

BBB bbb@abc.com

CCC ccc@abc.com

DDD ddd@abc.com

Cancel < Back

GB0398_01

GB0583_00

Add

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

Address Book

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Displays details for individual destinations.

Allows you to search for and sort destinations.

Searches by destination name.

GB0057_22

GB0583_00

Add

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Ext. Address Book

Address Entry

Address Book

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Sending Log History - Destination

10:10System Menu/Counter.

E-mail

1/1

abc@def.com

Cancel

GB0581_01

8-9

Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History

Automatic Log History Transmission

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been

logged.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.

2Select the function.

Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log history print. You can enter any number

between 1 and 16.

Manual Log History Transmission

You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

1Display the screen.

Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.

2Send the log history.

GB0578_00

Send Log History

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Auto Sending

< Back

1/1

Off

Destination

E-mail:

Report - Sending Log History

Job Log Subject

Sending Log History - Auto Sending

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

Auto Sending - Jobs

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(1 - 16)

< Back OKCancel

GB0579_00

GB0580_00

Send Log History

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Auto Sending

< Back

1/1

Off

Destination

E-mail:

Report - Sending Log History

Job Log Subject

GB0578_00

8-10

Status / Job Cancel > Sending the Log History

Setting E-mail Subject

Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8-7, display the screen.

2Enter an E-mail subject.

Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

GB0578_00

Send Log History

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Auto Sending

< Back

1/1

Off

Destination

E-mail:

Report - Sending Log History

Job Log Subject

GB0057_23

8-11

Status / Job Cancel > Check of Device Status

Check of Device Status

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices

depending on their status.

1Display the screen.

Select the device you wish to check.

2Check the status.

Scanner

The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error information (paper

jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed.

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Print Job Log

10:10

Send Job Log

Store Job Log

Scanner

Pause All

Print Jobs

2/4

Waiting

GB0052_01

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Printer

10:10

FAX

Toner Status

Paper Status

Pause All

Print Jobs

3/4

No Paper

Waiting

Running

GB0052_02

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Removable Memory

10:10

USB Keyboard

Staple

Pause All

Print Jobs

4/4

Attached

Invalid

GB0052_03

1Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up

and down.

GB0189_00

Scanner

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

1/1

End

Ready.

8-12

Status / Job Cancel > Check of Device Status

Printer

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or

printing are displayed.

FAX (Option)

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.

For details, refer to the FAX Operation Guide.

Removable Memory

• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.

• Press [Menu] and then [Format] to format external media.

• Press [Remove Memory] to safely remove the external media. This operation is the same

as that for Removing USB Memory on page 7-8.

Printer

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

1/1

End

Ready.

GB0190_00

GB0191_00

FAX

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

1/1

End

Receiving...

Menu Line Off

Removable Memory

Loaded.

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

Capacity

Used Area

Free Space

Status

1.9GB

684.1MB

1/1

End

1.2GB

Remove

Memory

GB0194_00

8-13

Status / Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and

Paper

Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.

1Display the screen.

Select the consumable you wish to check.

2Check the status.

Toner Status

You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%,

and check the status of waste toner box.

Paper Status

The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as 100%, 70%, 30%, and 0% (none),

however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by two levels as 100% and 0%. If there

is no paper in either cassette, the paper status will be shown as No Paper.

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Printer

10:10

FAX

Toner Status

Paper Status

Pause All

Print Jobs

3/4

No Paper

Waiting

Running

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Removable Memory

10:10

USB Keyboard

Staple

Pause All

Print Jobs

4/4

Attached

Invalid

GB0052_02GB0052_03

1Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up

and down.

Toner Status

100%

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

Cyan

Black

1/2

End

100%

Magenta

Yellow

GB0192_00

Toner Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

End

Waste Toner

2/2

GB0192_01

Paper Status

Plain

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

Plain

1/1

End

Plain

100%

GB0193_00

8-14

Status / Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper

Staple Status

You can check the status of staples

GB0195_00

Staple

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

Staple

1/1

End

9-1

9 Setup, Registration,

and User Management

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 9-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 9-3

Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

User Property ........................................................................................................................................... 9-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 9-8

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-9

Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-15

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-15

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 9-16

System ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18

Date/Timer ............................................................................................................................................. 9-23

Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 9-25

Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-27

User Login Administration ................................................................................................................................ 9-33

First User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-33

User Login Settings ............................................................................................................................... 9-34

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration ....................................................................................... 9-35

Local User Authorization ........................................................................................................................ 9-41

Adding a User ........................................................................................................................................ 9-37

Editing and Deleting Users .................................................................................................................... 9-43

Simple Login .......................................................................................................................................... 9-46

Group Authorization ............................................................................................................................... 9-52

Obtain Network User Property ............................................................................................................... 9-56

Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................................ 9-58

First Job Accounting Setup .................................................................................................................... 9-58

Job Accounting Settings ........................................................................................................................ 9-60

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting ....................................................................................................... 9-61

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-62

Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-63

Editing and Deleting Accounts ............................................................................................................... 9-65

Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-67

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-69

Printing an Accounting Report ............................................................................................................... 9-71

Job Accounting Default Setting .............................................................................................................. 9-73

Unknown Login User Name Job ............................................................................................................ 9-75

9-2

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

The system menu is operated as follows:

1Display the screen.

2Configure the function.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

NOTE

In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with

administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 9-37 for the default login user

name and password.

System Menu/Counter.

Date/Timer - Time Zone

-12:00 International Date Line West

10:10

-11:00 Samoa

-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11

-10:00 Hawaii

1/24

Cancel OK

System Menu/Counter.

Date/Timer

Date/Time

10/10/2010 10:10

10:10

Date Format

DD/MM/YYYY

+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo

Time Zone

Auto Panel Reset

1/3

< Back

GB0614_00

Selecting a value it to be

accepted.

Returns to the original

screen without making

any changes.

Accepts the settings

and exits.

Displays available

functions.

GB0610_00

Return to the previous

screen.

Scrolls up and down

when the list of values

cannot be displayed in

its entirety on a single

screen.

GB0054_03

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

10:10

Printer

System

Date/Timer

4/5

Displays available

functions.

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

GB0723_00

9-3

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

System Menu Settings

System Menu include;

Item Description Reference

Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures fax and Energy Saver settings. 3-26

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel. 9-5

Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings

for printing the result reports can also be configured.

9-5

Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. 3-11

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of

that information.

9-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose

tray.

9-8

Common Settings Configures overall machine operation. 9-9

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). 9-9

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. 9-9

Original Settings Configures settings for originals. 9-9

Paper Settings Configures settings for paper. 9-10

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed

or the Reset key is pressed.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.

Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs

easier.

IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults

immediately, move to the function screen and press the Reset key.

9-12

Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom

Box, computers, and FAX RX data.

9-13

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. 9-13

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. 9-14

Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White

setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.

9-14

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. 9-14

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter

characters.

9-15

USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. 9-15

Copy Configures settings for copying functions. 9-15

Send Configures settings for sending functions. 9-15

Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box. For

details on Job Box, refer to Printing on page 5-1 and for details on Sub

Address Box, refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit.

—

FAX Configures settings for fax functions. Refer to the Operation Guide for

FAX kit.

—

9-4

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Address Book/One Touch Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings. For details on

Address Book, refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on

page 6-24 and for details on One Touch Key, refer to Adding a

Destination on One Touch Key on page 6-33.

—

User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management. For details on

User Login, refer to User Login Administration on page 9-33, and for

details on Job Accounting, refer to Job Accounting on page 9-58.

—

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application

software screen. However, the following settings are available for

configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

9-16

System Configures machine system settings. 9-18

Network Configures network settings. 9-18

Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with

external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

9-22

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service

personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use

this menu.

—

Restart Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to

deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the

computer restart.)

—

RAM Disk Setting When optional memory is installed, a RAM disk can be created and its

size can be set. Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a

Job Box.

9-23

Main Memory Select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which

you are using the equipment.

9-23

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation

scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment.

9-23

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. 11-5

Date/Timer Configures settings related to the date and time. 9-23

Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. 9-25

Item Description Reference

Page

9-5

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Language

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be

configured.

Report Print

Item Description

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Value: English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano, Nederlands, Русский, Português

Item Description

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,

available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface

firmware version, network address and protocol.

Status Page

Network Status Page

Firmware Version

9-6

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Result Report Settings

Sending Log History

You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8-7.

Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.

Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.

Accounting Report Prints the accounting report, allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on

the machine.

Item Description

Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is

complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

Canceled before

Sending

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Notice Setting Attaches sent images to job finish notices.

Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach Image

Item Description

Firmware Version

ACCOUNT.REPORT

9-7

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

User Property

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

For details on User Login, refer to User Login Administration on page 9-33.

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

Account Name Displays the account to which the user belongs.

E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.

My Panel Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by

logging in. Network users are not displayed.

Group Name When group authorization is enabled, displays the name shown in the group list.

Group ID When group authorization is enabled, displays the ID shown in the group list.

9-8

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray.

Cassette1 (to 3)

Multi Purpose Tray

Item Description

Paper Size Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3).

Value

Auto: Automatically detect paper size. Select [Metric] or [Inch] for paper size.

Metric: Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.

inch: Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R or Oficio II.

others: Select from 8K, 16K-R, or 16K.

IMPORTANT: Specify the paper size as follows for the cassette that you want to use for fax

reception.

Inch models: Press [Auto] and then [Inch].

Metric models: Press [Auto] and then [Metric].

Media Type Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 2 and 3).

Value: Plain (105 g/m² or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m² or less), Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick (106 g/m² and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE: To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper

Action on page 9-11.

To change to a media type other than [Plain], refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10.

When the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each

setting cannot be selected.

Rough: Heavy 3

Bond: Heavy 3

Thick: Extra Heavy

Custom 1 to 8: Heavy3 or Extra Heavy

Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10 for selecting Custom 1- 8.

Item Description

Paper Size Set the paper size for multi-purpose tray.

Value

Metric: Select from A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio or 216 × 340 mm.

inch: Select from Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive or Oficio II.

others: Select from 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufukuhagaki, Youkei

4, Youkei 2 or Custom.

Size Entry: Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.

Inch models – X: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models – X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm

increments)

NOTE: For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Custom Paper

Size on page 9-10.

Media Type Set the media type for multi-purpose tray.

Value: Plain (105 g/m² or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m² or less), Labels,

Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick

(106 g/m² and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE: To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper

Action on page 9-11.

Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-10 for selecting Custom 1- 8.

9-9

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Default Screen

Sound

Original Settings

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Copy, Send, FAX, Document Box, Favorites, Status

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to 5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only

NOTE: [FAX Reception Only] is displayed when the optional fax is installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Key Confirmation (USB

Keyboard)

Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size. The custom size option is displayed on the screen

to select original size.

To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size option

is displayed on the screen to select original size.

Value

Custom: Off, On

Size Entry

Inch models – X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models – X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

9-10

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Paper Settings

Original Auto Detect Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic detection.

Value: A6, Hagaki

Folio Select Folio for automatic detection.

Value: Off, On

11 × 15" Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. The custom size option

is displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.

Value

Custom: Off, On

Size Entry

Inch models – X: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models – X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm

increments)

Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

For details, refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-11.

Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and multi purpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 to 3, Multi Purpose Tray

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value

Auto: Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.

Default Paper Source: Select paper source set by Default Paper Source.

Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection.

If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected.

Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

Media for Auto (B&W)

Item Description

9-11

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Media Type Setting

Select the media type you wish to change, press [Paper weight], and select the weight.

Y: Available N: Not available

Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or

the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the

combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the

print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority

Paper

Weight

Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra

Heavy

Weight (g/m²) 64 g/m² or

less

60 g/m² to

75 g/m²

76 g/m² to

90 g/m²

91 g/m² to

105 g/m²

106 g/m² to

128 g/m²

129 g/m² to

163 g/m²

164 g/m²

and more

Transpar-

encies

Plain YYY (default) YNNNN

Transparency NNNNY*

* The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.

Y* Y* Y* (default)

Rough YYYY (default) Y*Y*Y*N

Vellum Y (default) YYYNNNN

Labels Y*Y*Y*Y*Y* (default) Y*Y*Y*

Recycled YYY (default) YNNNN

Preprinted YYY (default) YNNNN

Bond YYYY (default) YYY*N

Cardstock NNNNY*Y* (default) Y*Y*

Color YYY (default) YNNNN

Prepunched YYY (default) YNNNN

Letterhead YYY (default) YNNNN

Envelope NNNNY*Y* (default) Y*Y*

Thick NNNNYY (default) YY*

Coated Y*Y*Y*Y*Y* (default) Y*Y*Y*

High Quality YYY (default) YNNNN

Custom 1-8 YYY (default) YYYY*Y*

Item Description

Multi Purpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

9-12

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Function Defaults

Item Description

Custom 1-8 Duplex Select the setting for duplex.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting

media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Item Description

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS

Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge Top, Top Edge Left

Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.

Value: Off, Collate Only, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, Each Page

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine, 200×200dpi

Fine, 200×100dpi Normal

Color Selection (Copy) Select the default copying color mode setting.

Value: Auto Color, Full Color, Black & White

Color Select.(Send/Store) Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White

Original Image Set the default original document type.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Text (for OCR), Printer Output

Background Density Adj. Select the default value for background density adjustment.

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Prevent Bleed-through Set the default value for preventing bleed-through.

Value: Off, On

Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals

set.

Value: 100%, Auto

Margin Set the default margin.

Value

Left/Right: -18 to 18, Top/Bottom: -18 to 18

Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75, Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75

Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults.

Value: Off, On

Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.

Value: Off, On

9-13

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

* If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the Reset key.

Paper Output

Preset Limit

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and

Time and Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time, Date and Time & Job

No.

E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by E-mail.

Value

Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission.

Value: Off, On

NOTE: This setting is displayed when the secure protocol [SSL] setting is [On].

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution

XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Detail Settings —

Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with

which to send and store images.

Value: 1 Low (High Comp.), 2, 3, 4, 5 High (Low Comp.)

PDF/A Set the default value for PDF/A when selecting the file format with which to send and store

images.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b

Item Description

Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Job Box, computers, and FAX RX

data.*

Value: Inner Tray, Finisher Tray, Job Separator Tray

NOTE: If the optional document finisher has been installed, [Inner Tray] will change to

[Finisher Tray].

* If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the Reset key.

Item Description

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 999 copies.

Item Description

9-14

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Error Handling

Color Toner Empty Action

Measurement

Item Description

Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media

type.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected

paper size or media type.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE: This function requires the optional document finisher.

Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE: This function requires the optional document finisher.

Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type

loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the

cassette or multi-purpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Inserted Paper Mismatch Select what to do when the paper size set for the paper source does not match the paper size

that was actually loaded.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Item Description

Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing

once the color toner runs out.

Value: Stop printing, Print in Black & White

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: mm, inch

9-15

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Keyboard Layout

USB Keyboard Type

Copy

Configures settings for copying functions.

Send

Configures settings for sending functions.

Item Description

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.

Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY

Item Description

USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro

Item Description

Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom

changes.*

Value

Most Suitable Size: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as Original Size: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.

* If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the Reset key.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic

zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.*

Value: Off, On

Reserve Next Priority Once the scan of the original is complete, the basic screen will be displayed, and you can

proceed to the next operation.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Dest. Check before Send When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing

the Start key.

Value: Off, On

Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination.

Value: Off, On

9-16

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Printer

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.

Forward Set the rule to send the original. Multiple rules can be selected.

Value

Forward: Off, On

Rule: FAX, E-mail, Folder(SMB), Folder(FTP)

NOTE: [FAX] is displayed when the optional FAX kit is installed.

Destination Set the destination to use when storing originals.

Select the destination using either of the following methods:

• Address Book

• Ext. Address Book

• Address Entry (E-mail)

• Address Entry (Folder)

Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.

Value: Destination, Address Book, Ext Address Book, One Touch

Item Description

Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of

printers.

Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL(Auto)

KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the

error report is output.

Value: Off, On

Color Setting You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white.

Value: Color, Black & White

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded

printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when

printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in

the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Item Description

9-17

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for

an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This

setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no

information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the

preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and

495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character

code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are

specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by half.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT: Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as

the paper type setting. (Refer to Cassette/MP Tray Settings on page 9-8.)

Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper. To

reduce wrinkle, try using thicker paper.

Item Description

9-18

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

System

Configures machine system settings.

Network

Configures network settings.

Host Name

TCP/IP

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine.

Item Description

TCP/IP Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. The IPv4 setting is available when selecting

[On] for [TCP/IP].*

DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether or not to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP addresses.

Value: ###.###.###.###

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet masks.

Value: ###.###.###.###

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway addresses.

Value: ###.###.###.###

9-19

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Item Description

IPv6 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The IPv6 setting is available when selecting

[On] for [TCP/IP].*

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

IPv6 Sets whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The

manual setting is available when selecting [On] for [IPv6].

Value

IP Address (Manual): (numbers (128 bit in total) separated by colons)

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: ###.###.###.###

NOTE: [Default Gateway] is displayed when selecting [Off] for [RA (Stateless)].

RA (Stateless) Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when

selecting [On] for [IPv6].

When selecting [On], [IP Address 1 (to 5)] appears under [IP Address (Stateless)/Prefix

Length].

Value: Off, On

DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available

when selecting [On] for [IPv6].

Value: Off, On

9-20

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Item Description

Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are

available when [TCP/IP] is [On].

NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol.*

Value: Off, On

SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

FTP Client

(Transmission)

Select whether or not to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port

Number. Use the FTP default port 21.

Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535

FTP Server (Reception) Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.*

Value: Off, On

SMB Client

(Transmission)

Select whether or not to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default

Port Number. Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445.

Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535

LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.*

Value: Off, On

SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3.*

Value: Off, On

HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.*

Value: Off, On

HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page

9-22.*

Value: Off, On

IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When selecting [On], set the IPP default Port

Number. Use the IPP default port 631.*

Value: Off, On, Port 1 - 65535

IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. When selecting [On], set the IPP over SSL default

Port Number. Use the IPP over SSL default port 443. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page

9-22.*

Value: Off, On, Port:1 - 65535

Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port.*

Value: Off, On

ThinPrint Select whether or not to use ThinPrint.

Value: Off, On

ThinPrintOverSSL Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL on page 9-22.

Value: Off, On

9-21

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

NetWare

AppleTalk

WSD Scan

WSD Print

Enhanced WSD

Enhanced WSD (SSL)

Item Description

NetWare Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network

from Auto, Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP.*

Value

Off, On, Frame Type: Auto, 802.3, Ether-II, 802.2, SNAP

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

AppleTalk Select the Apple Talk network connection.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

WSD Scan Select whether or not to use WSD Scan.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

WSD Print Select whether or not to use WSD Print.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use Kyocera’s proprietary web services.*

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA and TWAIN drivers. If you want to disable

KMnet Viewer functionality, Enhanced WSD, Enhanced WSD (SSL), SNMP and SNMPv3

(refer to Protocol Detail on page 9-20) must be set to [Off].

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Enhanced WSD (SSL) Set whether to use Kyocera’s proprietary web services over SSL.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

9-22

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

IPSec

Secure Protocol

LAN Interface

Interface Block Setting

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

Item Description

IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.*

Value: Off, On

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

IPP Security Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].*

Value: IPP/IPP over SSL, IPPoverSSL only

HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].*

Value: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTPS Only

LDAP Security (Ext. Address

Book)

Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server.

This setup is available when SSL is [On].*, **

Value: Off, LDAPv3/TLS, LDAP over SSL

** LDAP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 9-20.

LDAP Security (User Property)

Item Description

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.*

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2).

Value: Unblock, Block

Optional Interface 2

9-23

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

RAM Disk Setting

Main Memory

Optional Memory

Date/Timer

Configures settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

RAM Disk Setting When optional memory is installed, a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.

Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.*

Value

RAM Disk Setting: Off, On

RAM Disk Size: Setting range varies with Optional Memory settings.

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Main Memory Select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the

equipment.*

Value: Scan Size Priority, Scan Pages Priority

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the

application in which you are using the equipment.*

Value: Printer Priority, Normal, Copy Priority

* After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-

mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59),

Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list.

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the

default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE: The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Panel Reset

Timer.

Auto Sleep Set Auto Sleep to automatically enter Sleep Mode after a period of inactivity.

Value: Off, On

NOTE: Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-21 for Sleep.

The time allowed to elapse until the auto sleep function is activated is set with the Sleep

Timer.

9-24

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Sleep Level Select the Sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

NOTE: If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed, Energy Saver cannot be

specified.

(Detailed settings) Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

Network

USB Cable

Card Reader

RAM Disk

FAX

Value: Off, On

NOTE: When the machine enters Energy Saver, the data stored in the RAM disk will be

deleted. In addition, the machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print

data from a PC connected by USB cable. Also, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by

the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time

elapses. For details, refer to Responding to Error Messages on page 10-13.

Value: Off, On

Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments).

Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)

NOTE: If you select [Off] for [Auto Panel Reset], the time display does not appear.

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

NOTE: If you select [Off] for [Auto Sleep], the time display does not appear.

Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to

Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)

Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically

clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (every five seconds)

NOTE: If you select [Off] for [Auto Error Clear], the time display does not appear.

Item Description

9-25

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Item Description

Density Adjustment Adjust density.

Copy Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be

made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying. Adjustment can be

made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the

Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Set the toner-saving level when using EcoPrint.

Copy Lowers or raises the toner-saving level during copying. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.*

Value: 1 to 5

Printer Lowers or raises the toner-saving level during printing. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.

Value: 1 to 5

Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether

the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result

in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number

of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 5 (B & W), 4, 3, 2, 1 (Color)

Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when

the document processor is used.

Value

Off: No correction performed.

On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become

lighter than when using [Off].

On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The reproduction of fine

lines on the original may become lighter than when using On (Low).

Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4 (Lighter)

Color Registration When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may

occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to

resolve color drift.

For more information, refer to the Color Registration Procedure below.

9-26

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of

printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings

when the color of a finished copy does not match the original.

NOTE: To perform tone curve adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded

into a cassette.

Procedure

Press [Start] and print the first pattern. As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down

on the platen.

Press [Start]. The first pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second pattern is output. Confirm that a number "2" is printed on the pattern. Place the

pattern on the platen in the same way as the first pattern.

Press [Start]. The second pattern is read and adjustment begins.

Turn the main power switch off and on. The adjustment will be completed after restarting the

system.

Drum Refresh Perform Drum Refresh when images show streaking with white lines. Takes about 120

seconds.

Press [Start] to perform Drum Refresh.

NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the

printing is done.

Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color.

Press [Start] to perform Calibration.

Press [OK] after Calibration is complete.

NOTE: Perform Color Registration when the color drift is not adjusted even after

performing Calibration, and perform Gray Adjust if the color hue is not improved.

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove white and color streaks from the image.

Press [Start] to perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.

Press [OK] after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete.

DP Adjustment Adjust scan action of the document processor. Place the adjustment original in the document

processor.

Press [Start] and adjustment begins.

NOTE: This adjustment is for DP Leading edge and DP center adjust. Use this adjustment

when the copy is skewed when using the Document Processor or when advised by a

Service Technician.

Call Service to obtain the adjustment original.

* If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately, move to the function screen and press the Reset key.

Item Description

1 2

9-27

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Color Registration Procedure

Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through

normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed settings.

Normal Registration

1Display the screen.

2Print the chart.

A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), 3 chart

types are printed on one sheet: H-F (left), V (vertical), H-R (right).

NOTE

To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

IMPORTANT

Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration (see page 9-26). If color drift remains,

perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will

be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

10:10

Adjustment/Maintenance

5/5

Correcting Black Line

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Display Brightness

< Back

2/4

Off

Adjustment/Maintenance

Color Registration

Tone Curve Adjustment

GB0629_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0054_04

Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Detail

< Back

1/1

Adjustment/Maintenance - Color Registration

GB0641_00

GB0642_00

Color Registration - Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Registration

Print Chart

1/1

End

9-28

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Chart Example

3Enter the appropriate value.

1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,

registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

Color Registration Correction Chart

MH-F

MH-R

CH-F

CH-R

YH-F

YH-R

GB0641_00

Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Detail

< Back

1/1

Adjustment/Maintenance - Color Registration

GB0642_00

Color Registration - Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Registration

Print Chart

1/1

End

9-29

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

3Select the chart to be corrected.

4Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart.

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].

By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in

the reverse direction, press [+].

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart.

6Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.

7Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

GB0643_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

MH-R

CH-F

MH-F

Cancel

1/3

Start

Normal - Registration

GB0644_00

Registration - MH-1

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(I - A, 0 - 9)

Cancel OK

GB0643_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

MH-R

CH-F

MH-F

Cancel

1/3

Start

Normal - Registration

9-30

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Detailed Settings

1Display the screen.

2Print the chart.

A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-

1 to 7 and V-1 to 5 are printed.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

10:10

Adjustment/Maintenance

5/5

Correcting Black Line

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Display Brightness

< Back

2/4

Off

Adjustment/Maintenance

Color Registration

Tone Curve Adjustment

GB0629_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0054_04

Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Detail

< Back

1/1

Adjustment/Maintenance - Color Registration

GB0641_00

GB0642_01

Color Registration - Detail

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Registration

Print Chart

1/1

< Back

9-31

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

Chart Example

3Enter the appropriate value.

1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,

registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).

GB0641_00

Normal

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Detail

< Back

1/1

Adjustment/Maintenance - Color Registration

GB0642_01

Color Registration - Detail

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Registration

Print Chart

1/1

< Back

9-32

Setup, Registration, and User Management > System Menu

3Select the chart to be corrected.

4Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart.

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].

By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in

the reverse direction, press [+].

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart.

6Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.

7Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

GB0643_01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

MH-2

MH-3

MH-4

MH-1

Cancel

1/6

Start

Detail - Registration

GB0644_01

Registration - MH-1

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(I - A, 0 - 9)

Cancel OK

GB0643_01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

MH-2

MH-3

MH-4

MH-1

Cancel

1/6

Start

Detail - Registration

9-33

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name

and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by

the machine administrator.

First User Login Administration

Follow these steps for the first user login administration. For details about the configuration method, refer to User Login

Settings on page 9-34.

1Enable user login administration.

2Add a user.

3Log out.

4The registered user logs in for operations.

GB0435_00

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

GB0440_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin

1/1

End

Admin

DeviceAdmin 2500

User Login S... - Local User List

GB0723_00

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

9-34

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

User Login Settings

1Display the screen.

2Configure the function.

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration X page 9-35

Adding a User X page 9-37

Local User Authorization X page 9-41

Editing and Deleting Users X page 9-43

Simple Login X page 9-46

Group Authorization X page 9-52

Obtain Network User Property X page 9-56

NOTE

You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding

a User on page 9-37 for the default login user name and password.

GB0054_03

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

10:10

Printer

System

Date/Timer

4/5

User Login Settings

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Job Accounting Settings

< Back

1/1

Reject

Unknown ID Job

User Login/Job Accounting

GB0434_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0723_00

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

GB0435_02

System Menu/Counter.

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

User Login

Off

< Back

10:10

Local User List

Simple login settings

1/1

9-35

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Select the authentication method.

When selecting [Network Authentication]

Select the server type.

Enter the host name.

Up to 64 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.

Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication

Server to access the network authentication login page.

System Menu/Counter.

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

User Login

Off

< Back

10:10

Local User List

Simple login settings

1/1

GB0435_02

User Login Setting - User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local Authentication

Network Authentication

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0436_00

Network Authentication - Server Type

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Kerberos

Ext.

NTLM

Cancel

1/1

User Login - Network Authentication

Kerberos

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Host Name

Domain Name

Server Type

< Back

1/1

Save

GB0437_00

GB0438_00

User Login - Network Authentication

Kerberos

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Host Name

Domain Name

Server Type

< Back

1/1

Save

GB0437_00

GB0057_24

9-36

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Enter a domain name.

When selecting [NTLM] or [Kerberos] as the server type, enter a domain name of 256

characters or less.

Enter the port number.

When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.

Press [Save].

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only

domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized.

User Login - Network Authentication

Kerberos

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Host Name

Domain Name

Server Type

< Back

1/1

Save

abc

GB0437_02

GB0057_25

Network Authentication - Port

10:10

(1 - 65535)

Cancel OK

System Menu/Counter.

User Login - Network Authentication

Ext.

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Host Name

Port

Server Type

< Back

1/1

Save

abc

9093

GB0437_01

GB0439_00

User Login - Network Authentication

Ext.

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Host Name

Port

Server Type

< Back

1/1

Save

abc

9093

GB0437_01

9-37

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Adding a User

This adds a new user. You can add Up to 100 users (including the default login user name).

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

User Name*

* Mandatory at user registration.

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

registered.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login

without entering the account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 9-58.

E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address (up to 128 characters). The registered address will be

automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.

Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.

My Panel Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.

Local Authorization Restricts the use of the machine by user. Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function

(see page 9-41). The following restriction items are available:

Printer: Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.

Printer (Full Color): Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for the printer.

Copy: Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Copy (Full Color): Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for copies.

Send: Select whether or not to reject usage of send functions other than faxing.

FAX Transmission: Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

Storing in Box: Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.

Storing in Memory: Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

• User Name: DeviceAdmin

• Login User Name: 20 ppm model - 2000, 25 ppm model - 2500

• Login Password: 20 ppm model - 2000, 25 ppm model - 2500

• Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

• User Name: Admin

• Login User Name: Admin

• Login Password: Admin

• Access Level: Administrator

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

9-38

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

[User Name]

[Login User Name]

[Access Level]

Select the user access privilege.

3Check the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

[User Name]

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

GB0435_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin

1/1

End

Admin

DeviceAdmin 2500

User Login S... - Local User List

GB0440_00

GB0057_51

GB0057_53

GB0445_00

Add - Access Level

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Administrator

< Back

1/1

Next >Cancel

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Account Name

User Name

User A

**********

< Back

1/2

Save

Others

GB0446_00

GB0057_26

9-39

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Login User Name]

[Login Password]

Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes.

[Accounting Name]

[E-mail Address]

[Access Level]

Select the user access privilege.

GB0446_00

GB0057_28

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Account Name

User Name

User A

**********

< Back

1/2

Save

Others

GB0446_00

GB0057_29

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Account Name

User Name

User A

**********

< Back

1/2

Save

Others

GB0446_00

GB0603_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Account Name

User Name

User A

**********

< Back

1/2

Save

Others

Account Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Others

1/1

OKCancel

Displays details for individual account names.

Allows you to search for an account

name and sorts results.

Searches by account name.

GB0057_30

GB0446_01

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Access Level

My Panel

Local Authorization

E-mail Address

User

< Back

2/2

Save

Access Level

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Administrator

Cancel

1/1

GB0443_00

GB0446_01

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Access Level

My Panel

Local Authorization

E-mail Address

User

< Back

2/2

Save

9-40

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[My Panel]

For details on My Panel, refer to My Panel on page 9-42.

[Local Authorization]

Change the limitations as needed.

4Register the user.

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Access Level

My Panel

Local Authorization

E-mail Address

User

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0446_01

GB0749_00

My Panel

Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Screen

Shortcut

1/1

End

English

Copy

Shared Shortcut

Local Authorization

Off

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Printer (Full Color)

Copy

Copy (Full Color)

Printer

Off

Cancel

1/2

Off

GB0446

GB0839_00

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Access Level

My Panel

Local Authorization

E-mail Address

User

< Back

2/2

Save

GB0446_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0446_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

Select the item that you want to change.

Account Name

User Name

User A

**********

< Back

1/2

Save

Others

9-41

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Local User Authorization

Enables local user authorization. Job use can be prohibited for specific users. Set when adding a user (see page 9-37)

or editing and deleting users (see page 9-43).

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Select [On].

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

GB0435_00

User Login S... - Local User Authorization

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Administrator

Cancel

1/1

Off

GB0908_00

9-42

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

My Panel

Registers settings for individual users. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in. Set when Adding a

User (see page 9-37) or Editing and Deleting Users (see page 9-43).

Environments in which shortcut can be configured

[Language]

[Default Screen]

When [Send] or [FAX] has been selected, sets which screen to use as the default screen.

[Shortcut]

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Default Screen Set the screen appearing right after the user logs in (default screen).

Shortcut Select either [Shared Shortcut] or [Private Shortcut].

My Panel

Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Screen

Shortcut

1/1

End

English

Copy

Shared Shortcut

GB0749_00

GB0744_00

My Panel - Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Deutsch

English

Cancel

1/3

Français

Español

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

My Panel

Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Screen

Shortcut

1/1

End

English

Copy

Shared Shortcut

GB0749_00

My Panel - Default Screen

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Send

FAX

Document Box

Copy

Cancel

1/2

GB0745_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Default Screen - Send

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Address Book

Ext. Address Book

One Touch

Destination

Cancel

1/1

OK< Back

GB0746_00

My Panel - Shortcut

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Private Shortcut

Shared Shortcut

Cancel

1/1

GB0750_00

Displays details for individual shortcuts.

My Panel

Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Screen

Shortcut

1/1

End

English

Copy

Shared Shortcut

GB0749_00

9-43

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Editing and Deleting Users

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Edit or delete a user.

To edit a user

1Press […] for the user whose settings you wish to edit.

2Edit the user.

For more information about individual settings, refer to Adding a User on page 9-37.

[User Name]

[Login User Name]

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

GB0435_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin

1/1

End

Admin

DeviceAdmin 2500

User A User A

User Login S... - Local User List

GB0440_01

Searches by user name.

User:User A

User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User Name

User A

Cancel

1/2

Save

**********

Account Name Others

GB0441_00

GB0057_54

User:User A

User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User Name

User A

Cancel

1/2

Save

**********

Account Name Others

GB0441_00

GB0057_28

9-44

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Login Password]

Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes.

[Account Name]

[E-mail Address]

[My Panel]

For details on My Panel, refer to My Panel on page 9-42.

User:User A

User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User Name

User A

Cancel

1/2

Save

**********

Account Name Others

GB0441_00

GB0057_29

User:User A

User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User Name

User A

Cancel

1/2

Save

**********

Account Name Others

GB0441_00

GB0603_00

Account Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Others

1/1

OKCancel

Displays details for individual account names.

Allows you to search for an account

name and sorts results.

Searches by account name.

User:User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

E-mail Address

Access Level

My Panel

Administrator

Cancel

2/2

Save

Local Authorization

GB0057_30

GB0441_01

User:User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

E-mail Address

Access Level

My Panel

Administrator

Cancel

2/2

Save

Local Authorization

GB0441_01

GB0749_00

My Panel

Language

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Screen

Shortcut

1/1

End

English

Copy

Shared Shortcut

9-45

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Local Authorization]

[Local Authorization] is displayed when selecting [On] for [Local User Authorization].

Refer to Local User Authorization on page 9-41.

3Register the user.

To delete

Select the user you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

NOTE

Also, you can delete the user by selecting the user, press [Menu] and then [Delete].

User:User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

E-mail Address

Access Level

My Panel

Administrator

Cancel

2/2

Save

Local Authorization

Off

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Printer (Full Color)

Copy

Copy (Full Color)

Printer

Off

Cancel

1/2

Off

GB0839_00

GB0441_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

User:User A

User A

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User Name

User A

Cancel

1/2

Save

**********

Account Name Others

GB0441_00

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin

1/1

End

Admin

DeviceAdmin 2500

User A User A

User Login S... - Local User List

GB0440_01

9-46

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Simple Login

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to

use this functionality.

For details, refer to Adding a User on page 9-37.

Simple Login Settings

Enable simple login.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Enable simple login.

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

Name Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen.

User Select which registered users can use simple login.

Password Login Set whether to require entry of a login password at login.

Icon Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen.

GB0435_00

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

Simple Login Settings - Simple Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

Simple Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Simple Login Setup

< Back

1/1

Off

User Login/Job Acc... - Simple Login Settings

GB0710_00

GB0711_00

9-47

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Select a key with no registered user, and press [+].

2Enter the user information.

1Select the type of user.

2Select a user.

Local user

GB0435_00

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

Simple Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Simple Login Setup

< Back

1/1

User Login/Job Acc... - Simple Login Settings

GB0710_01

10:10

System Menu/Counter.

1/3

Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup

End

None None None

GB0712_00

GB0640_00

Add

10:10

Network User

Local User

Cancel

1/1

Next >

System Menu/Counter.

GB0726_00

Add - Local User

10:10

DeviceAdmin

1/2

Next >

2500

User A 1111

User B 2222

User C 3333

Cancel < Back

System Menu/Counter.

Displays details for individual users.Allows you to search for a

user and sorts results.

Searches by user name.

9-48

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Network user

Enter the Login User Name and Login Password.

3Enter the login user name to use with simple login.

3Check the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

[Name]

Add - Network User

10:10

Keyboard

< Back Next >Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Add - Network User

10:10

Keyboard

< Back Next >Cancel

abc

System Menu/Counter.

GB0704_00

GB0057_31

GB0704_01

GB0057_61

Add - Network User

10:10

Keyboard

< Back Next >Cancel

abc

***

System Menu/Counter.

GB0704_02

GB0057_32

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

User

Password Login

Icon

Name

User A

Off

< Back

1/1

Save

Male 1

System Menu/Counter.

GB0645_00

GB0057_62

9-49

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[User]

Select the user to use for simple logins from [Local User] or [Network User].

[Password Login]

[Icon]

4Register the user.

Editing and Deleting Users

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

User

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Network User

Local User

Cancel

1/1

Next >

GB0645_00

GB0740_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

User

Password Login

Icon

Name

User A

Off

< Back

1/1

Save

Male 1

System Menu/Counter.

Password Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0645_00

GB0736_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

User

Password Login

Icon

Name

User A

Off

< Back

1/1

Save

Male 1

System Menu/Counter.

Icon

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Female 2

Basket

Trumpet

Male 1

Cancel

Soccer

Piano

Car

Male 2

Tennis

Guitar

Bicycle

Female 1

1/2

GB0645_00

GB0828_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

User

Password Login

Icon

Name

User A

Off

< Back

1/1

Save

Male 1

System Menu/Counter.

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0645_00

Add - Confirmation

User A

10:10

Cancel

User

Password Login

Icon

Name

User A

Off

< Back

1/1

Save

Male 1

System Menu/Counter.

9-50

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

2Edit or delete a user.

To edit a user

1Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press [Menu] and then [Edit].

2Edit the user.

[Name]

[User]

Select the user to use for simple logins from [Local User] or [Network User].

[Password Login]

Simple Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Simple Login Setup

< Back

1/1

User Login/Job Acc... - Simple Login Settings

GB0435_00

User Login

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Local User List

< Back

1/1

Local Authentication

Simple login settings

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

Local User Authorization

Off

GB0710_01

GB0712_01

10:10

System Menu/Counter.

1/1

Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup

End

User A

User D

User B

User E

User C

None

None None None

GB0738_00

Add

10:10

Edit

Delete

1/1

Edit

Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Password Login

Icon

1/1

Cancel Save

User A

Off

Male 1

GB0739_00

GB0057_62

User

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Network User

Local User

Cancel

1/1

Next >

Edit

Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Password Login

Icon

1/1

Cancel Save

User A

Off

Male 1

GB0739_00

GB0740_00

Edit

Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Password Login

Icon

1/1

Cancel Save

User A

Off

Male 1

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

Password Login

GB0739_00

GB0736_01

9-51

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Icon]

3Register the user.

To delete

Select the user you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

NOTE

You can also delete a user by selecting the name, pressing [Menu], and then pressing

[Delete].

Edit

Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Password Login

Icon

1/1

Cancel Save

User A

Off

Male 1

Icon

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Female 2

Basket

Trumpet

Male 1

Cancel

Soccer

Piano

Car

Male 2

Tennis

Guitar

Bicycle

Female 1

1/2

GB0739_00

GB0828_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Edit

Name

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Password Login

Icon

1/1

Cancel Save

User A

Off

Male 1

GB0739_00

10:10

System Menu/Counter.

1/1

Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup

End

User A

User D

User B

User E

User C

None

None None None

GB0712_01

9-52

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Group Authorization

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization Settings

Use the group authorization.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Select [On].

Add a Group

and groups belong to Others.

NOTE

To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and

[NTLM] or [Kerberos] must be selected as the server type in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 9-

35. Select [On] for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9-20.

Group ID* Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).

Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.

Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.

Printer (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for the printer.

Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Copy (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for copies.

Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.

FAX Transmission** Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

GB0435_03

System Menu/Counter.

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

User Login

Network Authentication

< Back

10:10

Local User List

Simple login settings

Group Authorization Set.

1/2

Group Authorization

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group List

< Back

1/1

Off

User Login/Job... - Group Authorization Set.

GB0450_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Group Authorization Set. - Group Authorization

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0451_00

9-53

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Enter the group information.

[Group ID]

[Group Name]

Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.

Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.

* For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows. If you are using Windows Server 2008, check At-

tribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool in-

cluded on the installation CD or DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).

** This item is displayed when the optional fax is installed.

GB0435_03

System Menu/Counter.

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

User Login

Network Authentication

< Back

10:10

Local User List

Simple login settings

Group Authorization Set.

1/2

Group Authorization

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group List

< Back

1/1

User Login/Job... - Group Authorization Set.

GB0450_01

Group Authorization Set. - Group List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Others

1/1

End

GB0452_00

GB0458_00

Add - Group ID

10:10

(1 - 4294967295)

Cancel Next >

System Menu/Counter.

GB0057_33

9-54

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Access Level]

3Check the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

[Group ID]

[Group Name]

[Access Level]

GB0459_00

Add - Access Level

10:10

User

Administrator

< Back

1/1

Next >Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Add - Confirmation

1234567890

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group Name

Access Level

Printer

Group ID

Group 01

Administrator

< Back

1/3

Save

Off

Cancel

GB0460_00

Group ID

10:10

(1 - 4294967295)

Cancel OK

System Menu/Counter.

GB0454_00

Add - Confirmation

1234567890

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group Name

Access Level

Printer

Group ID

Group 01

Administrator

< Back

1/3

Save

Off

Cancel

GB0460_00

GB0057_63

Access Level

10:10System Menu/Counter.

User

Administrator

Cancel

1/1

GB0460_00

GB0455_00

Add - Confirmation

1234567890

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group Name

Access Level

Printer

Group ID

Group 01

Administrator

< Back

1/3

Save

Off

Cancel

9-55

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Printer], [Printer (Full Color)], [Copy], [Copy (Full Color)], [Send], [FAX Transmission],

[Storing in Box], [Storing in Memory]

Change the restrictions as needed.

4Register the group.

Off

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Copy

Copy (Full Color)

Send

Printer (Full Color)

Off

< Back

2/3

Save

Off

Cancel

Add - Confirmation

Printer

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Reject Usage

Off

Cancel

1/1

Add - Confirmation

1234567890

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group Name

Access Level

Printer

Group ID

Group 01

Administrator

< Back

1/3

Save

Off

Cancel

GB0460_00

GB0456_00

GB0460_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Add - Confirmation

Off

10:10

Storing in Memory

< Back

3/3

SaveCancel

System Menu/Counter.

Off

Storing in Box

FAX Transmission

GB0460_02

Add - Confirmation

1234567890

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Group Name

Access Level

Printer

Group ID

Group 01

Administrator

< Back

1/3

Save

Off

Cancel

GB0460_00

9-56

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

Obtain Network User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to User Login Settings on page 9-34, display the screen.

2Configure the function.

[Server Name]

Up to 64 characters can be entered.

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

NOTE

To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the

authentication method and [NTLM] or [Kerberos] must be selected as the server type in Enabling/Disabling User Login

Administration on page 9-35.

Server Name*

* If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication.

Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters).

Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.

Name 1**

** If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32

characters).

Name 2***

*** Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2, and if the value of displayName

is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as Mike Smith

Sales.

E-mail Address****

**** If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 128 characters).

Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).

GB0435_01

Obtain NW User Property

10:10System Menu/Counter.

< Back

2/2

Off

User Login/Job Acco... - User Login Setting

User Login Setting - Obtain NW User Property

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0691_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Obtain NW User... - LDAP Server Information

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Port

Name 1

Name 2

Server Name

389

displayName

< Back

1/2

GB0692_00

GB0057_34

9-57

Setup, Registration, and User Management > User Login Administration

[Port]

[Name 1] and [Name 2]

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

[E-mail Address]

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

[Search Timeout]

3Press [OK].

Obtain NW User Property - Port

10:10

(1 - 65535)

Cancel OK

System Menu/Counter.

Obtain NW User... - LDAP Server Information

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Port

Name 1

Name 2

Server Name

389

displayName

< Back

1/2

Abc

GB0692_02

GB0439_01

Obtain NW User... - LDAP Server Information

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Port

Name 1

Name 2

Server Name

389

displayName

< Back

1/2

Abc

GB0692_02

GB0057_35

Obtain NW User... - LDAP Server Information

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Search Timeout

E-mail Address

60sec.

mail

< Back

2/2

GB0692_01

GB0057_36

Obtain NW User... - LDAP Server Information

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Search Timeout

E-mail Address

60sec.

mail

< Back

2/2

LDAP Server Information - Search Timeout

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(5 - 255)

Cancel

sec.

GB0692_01

GB0693_00

9-58

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Job Accounting

Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.

Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.

• Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts.

• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.

• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.

• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.

• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.

First Job Accounting Setup

Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup. For details about the configuration method, refer to Job Accounting

Settings on page 9-60.

1Enable job accounting.

2Add an account.

3Log out.

GB0462_00

Job Accounting Settings - Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0473_00

Job Accounti... - Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department

EndMenu

1/1

00000001

9-59

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

4Other users login for operations.

GB0725_00

10:10

LoginCheck

Counter

Enter the account ID.

9-60

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Job Accounting Settings

1Display the screen.

2Configure the function.

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting X page 9-61

Adding an Account X page 9-63

Editing and Deleting Accounts X page 9-65

Restricting the Use of the Machine X page 9-67

Counting the Number of Pages Printed X page 9-69

Printing an Accounting Report X page 9-71

Job Accounting Default Setting X page 9-73

Unknown Login User Name Job X page 9-75

NOTE

You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding

a User on page 9-37 for the default login user name and password.

GB0054_03

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

10:10

Printer

System

Date/Timer

4/5

User Login Settings

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Job Accounting Settings

< Back

1/1

Reject

Unknown ID Job

User Login/Job Accounting

GB0434_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0723_00

10:10

Keyboard

LoginMenu

Enter login user name and password.

Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Print Accounting Report

< Back

1/2

Off

Total Job Accounting

Each Job Accounting

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

GB0461_00

9-61

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

2Enable job accounting.

NOTE

When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically

executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter

the Account ID.

GB0461_00

Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Print Accounting Report

< Back

1/2

Off

Total Job Accounting

Each Job Accounting

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

GB0462_00

Job Accounting Settings - Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Off

Cancel

1/1

9-62

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

1Enter the account ID.

If this screen is displayed during operations, enter the account ID.

2Log in.

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 3-

12.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be

skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 9-37.)

Logout

When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter the account ID again.

If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and

By pressing [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number

of pages scanned.

GB0725_00

10:10

LoginCheck

Counter

Enter the account ID.

GB0725_01

10:10

LoginCheck

Counter

Enter the account ID.

********

9-63

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Adding an Account

This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

2Enter the account information.

[Account Name]

[Account ID]

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the Use

of the Machine on page 9-67.

NOTE

Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.

Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Setting

< Back

2/2

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

Job Accounti... - Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

EndMenu

1/1

GB0461_01

GB0473_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0057_37

GB0479_00

Add - Account ID

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(0 ‒ 99999999)

< Back Next >Cancel

9-64

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

3Check the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

[Account Name]

Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11-7 for details on entering characters.

[Account ID]

Restrictions

For details, refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-67.

4Register the account.

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Total)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Full Color) Off

GB0480_00

GB0057_64

Account ID

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(0 ‒ 99999999)

Cancel OK

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Total)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Full Color) Off

GB0480_00

GB0476_00

Print (Total)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Counter Limit

Reject Usage

Off

Cancel

1/1

GB0480_00

GB0474_00

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Total)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Full Color) Off

GB0480_01

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

FAX Transmission Off

< Back

2/2

Save

Scan (Others) Off

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0480_00

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Total)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Full Color) Off

9-65

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Editing and Deleting Accounts

This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

2Edit or delete an account.

To edit an account

1Press […] for the account name you wish to edit.

You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No. Search key.

2Edit the account.

[Account Name]

[Account ID]

Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Setting

< Back

2/2

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

GB0461_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Job Accounti... - Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department

EndMenu

1/1

00000001

GB0473_00

Searches by account name.

Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results.

Account:Section 01

Section 01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Full Color)

Account Name

00000001

Cancel

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Total) Off

GB0478_00

GB0057_65

Account:Section 01

Section 01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Full Color)

Account Name

00000001

Cancel

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Total) Off

Account ID

10:10System Menu/Counter.

(0 ‒ 99999999)

Cancel OK

GB0478_00

GB0476_00

9-66

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Restriction

For details, refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-67.

3Register the account.

To delete

Select the account name you wish to delete and press [(Delete)] (the trash can icon).

Print (Total)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Counter Limit

Reject Usage

Off

Cancel

1/1

Account:Section 01

Section 01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Full Color)

Account Name

00000001

Cancel

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Total) Off

GB0478_00

GB0474_00

GB0478_01

Account:Section 01

Off

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Cancel

2/2

Save

FAX Transmission

Scan (Others)

Off

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Account:Section 01

Section 01

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Full Color)

Account Name

00000001

Cancel

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Total) Off

GB0478_00

Job Accounti... - Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Sales department

EndMenu

1/1

00000001

GB0473_00

9-67

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages available.

Set when Adding an Account (see page 9-63) or Editing and Deleting Accounts (see page 9-65).

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for Copier/Printer Count on

page 9-73.

Restriction Items

[Individual] selected for Copier/Printer Count

[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Applying Restriction

For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction, refer to Apply Limit on page 9-73.

Copy (Total) Limits the total number of pages used for full-color and black and white copying.

Copy (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.

Printer (Total) Limits the total number of pages used for color and black and white printing.

Printer (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for color printing.

Scan (Others) Limits the number of pages scanned (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*

* This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

Limits the number of pages sent by fax.

Print (Total) Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing.

Print (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.

Scan (Others) Limits the number of pages scanned (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*

* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

Limits the number of pages sent by fax.

Off No restriction given.

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 pages.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

9-68

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

1Select the item to limit.

[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count

[Individual] selected for Copier/Printer Count

2Select a restriction method.

If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+], [-] or numeric keys to select the number of pages, and

press [OK].

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

FAX Transmission Off

< Back

2/2

Save

Scan (Others) Off

GB0480_00

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Print (Total)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Print (Full Color) Off

GB0480_01

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

Add - Confirmation

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

FAX Transmission

Off

< Back

2/2

Save

Scan (Others)

Off

Printer (Total)

Printer (Full Color)

Off

GB0480_02

Add - Confirmation

Section 01

10:10

Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

Account ID

Copy (Full Color)

Account Name

00000001

< Back

1/2

Save

Off

Copy (Total) Off

GB0480_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0474_00

Print (Total)

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Counter Limit

Reject Usage

Off

Cancel

1/1

9-69

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

Types of the counts are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

To count the number of pages for all account, select [Total Job Accounting]. To count the

number of pages by account, select [Each Job Accounting].

To count the number of pages by account name, press […] for the account name whose usage

you wish to view.

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can

also use [by Paper Size], [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the number of pages used.

• For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white and full-color copying as well

as the total pages used.

• For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white and full-color printing as well

as the total pages used.

• You can use [by Paper Size] to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in

Count by Paper Size on page 9-74 as well as the number of pages used in other paper

sizes.

• You can use [by Duplex] to check the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,

Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both.

• You can use [by Combine] to check the number of pages used in Combine (None) mode,

Combine (2 in 1) mode, Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the

total number of pages scanned.

* This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

FAX Transmission Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX Transmission Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.

GB0461_02

Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Print Accounting Report

< Back

1/2

Total Job Accounting

Each Job Accounting

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

GB0469_00

Job Ac... - Each Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Others

Sales department

EndMenu

1/1

00000001

Searches by account name.

Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results.

9-70

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

2View the number of pages.

To reset the counter

Total Job Accounting - Printed Pages

111

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Copy (Full Color)

Copy (Total)

Printer (B & W)

Copy (B & W)

222

333

1/3

End

111

Account:Sales department

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Scanned Pages

FAX TX Pages

FAX TX Time

Printed Pages

1/1

End

0:00:00

Counter

Reset

GB0463_00

GB0464_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

GB0463_00

Account:Sales department

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Scanned Pages

FAX TX Pages

FAX TX Time

Printed Pages

1/1

End

0:00:00

Counter

Reset

9-71

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Printing an Accounting Report

Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

For count by paper size, page counts will be printed by paper size under "Paper Count".

1Prepare paper.

Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

Copier/Printer Count Format

When [Total] is selected for Copier/

Printer Count

Print (Total) Total number of pages used for copying and printing

Total number of pages used for full-color copying

and printing

Total number of pages used for black-and-white

copying and printing

When [Individual] is selected for Copier/

Printer Count

Copy Total number of pages used for copying

Total number of pages used for full-color copying

Total number of pages used for black-and-white

copying

Print Total number of pages used for printing

Total number of pages used for full-color printing

Total number of pages used for black-and-white

printing

Shared statistics Scan Total number of pages scanned

Total number of pages scanned for copying

Total number of pages faxed

Total number of other pages scanned

Fax Total number of pages received

Total number of pages sent

Total duration of fax transmissions

Other Total number of duplex pages printed

Total number of 1-sided pages printed

Total number of combine (2 in 1) pages

Total number of combine (4 in 1) pages

Total number of non-combine pages printed

9-72

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

3Print reports.

GB0461_02

Job Accounting

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Print Accounting Report

< Back

1/2

Total Job Accounting

Each Job Accounting

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

9-73

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Job Accounting Default Setting

Sets default settings related to job accounting.

Display the screen.

1Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9-60, display the screen.

Setting Items

Item Description

Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of

restriction.

Value

Immediately*: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be

rejected.

Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.

Copier/Printer Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of

both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction

on the count and count method.

Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-67, Counting the Number of

Pages Printed on page 9-69 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 9-71 for

details.

Value: Total, Individual

Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of

pages used.

Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9-67.

Value: 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments

Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Default Setting

< Back

2/2

User Login/Job... - Job Accounting Settings

GB0461_01

GB0481_00

Apply Limit

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Copy/Printer Count

< Back

1/1

Subsequently

Individual

Default Counter Limit

Count by Paper Size

User Login/Job Accounting - Default Setting

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

9-74

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Count by Paper Size This counts the number of pages used for specific paper sizes (for example, count the

number of pages printed using A4 paper).

You can specify five paper sizes (1 to 5). The number of pages used for the paper sizes

specified here can be referenced under [by Paper Size] when counting page use. This

information can also be printed in accounting reports.

Refer to Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 9-69 and Printing an

Accounting Report on page 9-71.

You can also count page use by specifying paper size and media type (for example,

count the number of pages printed in color using A4 paper). If [All Media Types] is

specified, the number of pages printed using the specified paper size is counted

regardless of media type.

Value

Paper Size 1 to 5

Paper size: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Folio, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement

Media type: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick (106 g/

m² and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

* The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Item Description

9-75

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

Unknown Login User Name Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent IDs). If the

User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.

1Display the screen.

2Select the function.

GB0054_03

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

10:10

Printer

System

Date/Timer

4/5

User Login Settings

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Job Accounting Settings

< Back

1/1

Reject

Unknown ID Job

User Login/Job Accounting

GB0434_00

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

User Login/Job Accounting - Unknown ID Job

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Permit

Reject

Cancel

1/1

GB0491_00

9-76

Setup, Registration, and User Management > Job Accounting

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Toner Container Replacement ......................................................................................................................... 10-2

Waste Toner Box Replacement ........................................................................................................................ 10-4

Replacing Staples ............................................................................................................................................ 10-5

Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-6

Glass Platen .......................................................................................................................................... 10-6

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................. 10-6

Solving Malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................ 10-8

Responding to Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 10-13

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-23

Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-23

Multi Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................................... 10-24

Inside the Right Cover 1 ...................................................................................................................... 10-24

Cassette 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 10-25

Inside the Right Cover 3 ...................................................................................................................... 10-25

Cassette 2 or 3 .................................................................................................................................... 10-26

Optional Document Finisher ................................................................................................................ 10-26

Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam .............................................................................................. 10-27

Bridge Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 10-27

Document Processor ........................................................................................................................... 10-28

10-2

Troubleshooting > Toner Container Replacement

Toner Container Replacement

When the touch panel displays Toner is empty., replace the toner.

Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. The procedures here represent the yellow toner

container.

1Remove the old toner container.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause

burns.

NOTE

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected

toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Y C M K

10-3

Troubleshooting > Toner Container Replacement

2Prepare the new toner container.

3Install the new toner container.

CLICK!

10-4

Troubleshooting > Waste Toner Box Replacement

Waste Toner Box Replacement

When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box., replace the waste toner box.

1Remove the old waste toner box.

2Install the new waste toner box.

CLICK!

10-5

Troubleshooting > Replacing Staples

Replacing Staples

If a message displays indicating that staples have run out, the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with

staples.

1Remove the staple cartridge holder.

After the cartridge holder returned to the original position, open the staple cover and remove

the cartridge holder.

2Remove the empty staple cartridge.

3Insert the new staple cartridge.

4Re-install the staple cartridge holder.

The staple cartridge holder will click into place when it has been inserted correctly.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your service representative or the place of purchase.

NOTE

The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples.

10-6

Troubleshooting > Cleaning

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.

Glass Platen

Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened

with alcohol or mild detergent.

Document Processor

If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor, clean the slit

glass with the supplied cleaning cloth.

1Wipe the slit glass.

Caution

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals.

NOTE

Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for

cleaning.

10-7

Troubleshooting > Cleaning

2Wipe the white guide.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The operation panel does not

respond when the main

power switch is turned on.

Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. 2-11

Pressing the Start key does

not produce printouts.

Is there a message on the touch

panel?

Determine appropriate response to the

message and respond accordingly.

10-13

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Press the Power key to recover the

machine from Sleep mode. The

machine will be ready to copy within 23

seconds.

2-21

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen,

place them face-down and align them

with the original size indicator plates.

3-7

When placing originals in the

document processor, place them face-

up.

3-9

— Check that the application software is

correctly operated.

—

Printouts are too light. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-2

If you experience frequent problems,

turn the cassette heater switch on.

2-4

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. 3-50

9-25

Is the toner distributed evenly within

the toner container?

Shake the toner container from side to

side about several times.

10-2

Is there a message indicating the

addition of toner?

Replace the toner container. 10-2

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 4-15

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [DEV-CLN], and then press

[Start].

—

— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-26

— Make sure the paper type setting is

correct the paper being used.

9-8

Printouts are too dark. Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. 3-50

9-25

The background density is

obtrusive.

— Run [Background Density Adjustment]. 3-54

9-25

Printouts have a moire

pattern (dots grouped

together in patterns and not

aligned uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? Set the image quality to [Photo]. 3-52

10-9

Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions

Printouts are not clear. Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. 3-52

Dirt on the print side of the

paper.

Is the platen or the document

processor dirty?

Clean the platen or the document

processor.

10-6

— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-26

Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in very

humid conditions?

Use in an environment that has

suitable humidity.

1-3

If you experience frequent problems,

turn the cassette heater switch on.

2-4

— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-26

Images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen,

align them with the original size

indicator plates.

3-7

When placing originals in the

document processor, align the original

width guides securely before placing

the originals.

3-8

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width

guides.

3-2

— Perform center line adjustment. For

more information about how to do so,

contact your service representative.

—

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. 3-2

— Change the orientation in which the

paper is positioned.

1-15

3-3

3-7

Is the paper of the supported type? Is it

in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

3-2

Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-2

Are there any loose scraps or jammed

paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. 10-23

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-2

If you experience frequent problems,

turn the cassette heater switch on.

2-4

— Change the orientation in which the

paper is positioned.

1-15

3-3

3-7

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. 2-11

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 2-12

Are the printer cable and network

cable connected?

Connect the correct printer cable and

network cable securely.

2-10

Was the machine powered on before

the printer cable was connected?

Power on the machine after

connecting the printer cable.

2-10

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. 8-3

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-10

Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions

Documents are printed

improperly.

Are the application software settings at

the PC set properly?

Check that the printer driver and

application software settings are set

properly.

—

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

9-22

— Check that the USB memory is

securely plugged into the machine.

—

When displaying an image

sent from the machine on the

PC, an image size is shrunk

vertically or horizontally.

Have you selected 200×100dpi Normal

or 200×400dpi Super for the scan

resolution?

Select a scan resolution other than

200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi

Super when sending an image.

3-51

Printouts have lines. Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. 10-6

— Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. 9-26

Dirt on the top edge or back

of the paper.

Check interior of the transfer unit. Open the right cover and check for

toner on the paper transfer unit. Clean

interior of the unit using a soft, dry, lint-

free cloth.

—

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

Have the developer unit and drum unit

been loaded properly?

Load the developer unit and drum unit

properly.

—

— Open and then close the right cover. —

— Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-26

— If you experience frequent problems,

turn the cassette heater switch on.

2-4

Print on the back of the sheet

is visible on the front.

— Set Prevent Bleed-through to [On]. 3-55

Skewed-color printout. — Run [Calibration]. 9-26

— Run [Color Registration]. 9-27

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-11

Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions

Offset occurs. — Run [Drum Refresh]. 9-26

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [MC] and increase the

adjustment value. Increase the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1

level again. If there is still no

improvement, return the setting to the

original value.

—

Part of the image is

periodically faint or blurred.

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [MC] and decrease the

adjustment value. Decrease the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1

level again. If there is still no

improvement, return the setting to the

original value.

—

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [DEV-CLN], and then press

[Start].

—

Irregular horizontal lines

appear in the image.

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [MC] and decrease the

adjustment value. Decrease the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1

level again. If there is still no

improvement, return the setting to the

original value.

—

The altitude is 1500 m or

higher and irregular

horizontal white lines appear

in the image.

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [Altitude Adjustment] and then

select [High 1]. If there is still no

improvement, change the value to

[High 2].

—

The altitude is 1500 m or

higher and dots appear in the

image.

— Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting], [Altitude Adjustment] and then

select [High 1]. If there is still no

improvement, change the value to

[High 2].

—

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-12

Troubleshooting > Solving Malfunctions

Colors appear different than

you anticipated.

Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. 3-52

Have you loaded color copy paper into

the paper tray?

Load color copy paper into the paper

tray.

—

— Run [Calibration]. 9-26

— Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 9-26

—When making copies

Adjust the color balance.

4-17

When printing from a computer

Adjust the color using the printer driver.

Printer Driver

User Guide

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment. is displayed.

Over long periods of use, the effects of

the ambient temperature and humidity

can cause color output hues to vary

slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 9-26

The machine makes a

clicking sound before starting

to print or after printing.

— The machine is adjusting itself. It is not

a machine failure.

—

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

2-10

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings

properly.

9-18

Have the folder sharing settings been

configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder properties.

6-7

Has the SMB protocol been set to

[On]?

Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. 2-23

Has the [Host Name] been entered

properly?*

Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

6-5

Has the [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared

folder.

6-10

Has the [Login User Name] been

entered properly?*,**

Check the domain name and login

user name.

6-19

Has the same domain name been

used for the [Host Name] and [Login

User Name]?

Delete the domain name and

backslash ("\") from the [Login User

Name].

6-19

Has the [Login Password] been

entered properly?

Check the login password. 6-19

Have exceptions for Windows Firewall

been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

6-11

6-14

Do the time settings for the equipment,

domain server, and data destination

computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server, and

data destination computer to the same

time.

—

Is the touch panel displaying Send

error.?

Refer to Responding to Send Error.10-20

* You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

** You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-13

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Responding to Error Messages

If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Acceptable staple count

exceeded.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

Is the acceptable staple count

exceeded? For details, refer to

Document Finisher (option) on

page 11-22.

Press [Continue] to print without

stapling.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Add the following paper in

cassette #.

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

other paper source.

Press [Continue] to print on the paper in

the currently selected paper source.

3-3

Add the following paper in the

multi purpose tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multi purpose tray?

Load paper.

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

other paper source.

Press [Continue] to print on the paper in

the currently selected paper source.

3-5

Does the paper size set for the

paper source matches the paper

size that was actually loaded?

Press [Continue] to continue printing.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box limit exceeded.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— Document box is full, and no further

storage is available; Job is canceled.

Press [End]. Try to perform the job again

after printing or deleting data from the

Document box.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Cannot connect to Authentication

Server.*

— Set machine time to match the server’s

time.

9-23

— Check the domain name. 9-33

— Check the host name. 9-33

— Check the connection status with the

server.

—

10-14

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Cannot duplex print on the

following paper.*

Did you select a paper size/

media type that cannot be duplex

printed?

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

available paper.

Press [Continue] to print without using

Duplex function.

4-8

Cannot offset the following

paper.*

Did you select a paper size/

media type that cannot be offset?

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

available paper.

Press [Continue] to print without using

Offset function.

3-43

Cannot print the specified

number of copies.*

– Only one copy is available due to

processing too many jobs in parallel.

Press [Continue] to continue printing.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Cannot process this job.* — This job is canceled because it is

restricted by User Authorization or Job

Accounting. Press [End].

—

Cannot staple at the specified

position.

Have you selected a position that

cannot be stapled?

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

available paper.

Press [Continue] to print without using

Staple function.

—

Cannot staple the following

paper.*

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be stapled?

Press [Paper Selection] to select the

available paper.

Press [Continue] to print without using

Staple function.

—

Cassette # failure. — Contact your Service Representative.

Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting] and then [Enable Repaired

Unit]. Press [Execute] to perform Enable

Repaired Unit.

—

Check the document processor. Is the document processor

open?

Close the document processor. —

Is the top cover of the document

processor open?

Close the top cover of the document

processor.

—

Check waste toner box. Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. 10-4

— The waste toner box is not installed

correctly. Set it correctly.

10-4

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Developer unit is not installed.

[C][M][Y][K]

— Replace the developer unit (g) to our

specified developer unit. See the leaflet

supplied with the developer unit.

—

Drum unit is not installed.

[C][M][Y][K]

— Replace the drum unit (f) to our

specified drum unit. See the leaflet

supplied with the drum unit for details.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-15

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Error occurred at cassette #. — Remove the indicated cassette. Press

[Next >] to follow the instructions.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— Failed to specify Job Accounting when

processing the job externally. The job is

canceled. Press [End].

—

Failed to store job retention data. — The job is canceled. Press [End]. —

Finisher failure. — Contact your Service Representative.

Press the System Menu/Counter key,

[Adjustment/Maintenance], [Service

Setting] and then [Reset Disable

Function Mode]. Press [Execute] to

perform Reset Disable Function Mode.

—

Finisher tray is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded for the

document finisher tray?

Remove paper from the document

finisher tray.

—

Fuser unit is not installed. — Replace the fuser unit (h-1) to our

specified fuser unit. See the leaflet

supplied with the fuser unit for details.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

High temperature. Adjust room

temp.

— Adjust the temperature and the humidity

of your room.

1-3

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account ID.* — The account ID was incorrect when

processing the job externally. The job is

canceled. Press [End].

—

Incorrect Login User Name or

Password.*

— The login user name or password was

incorrect when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled. Press

[End].

—

10-16

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Inner tray is full of paper. — Remove paper from the inner tray.

Printing then resumes.

—

Intermediate transfer unit is not

installed.

— Replace the intermediate transfer unit

(r) to our specified intermediate transfer

unit. See the leaflet supplied with

intermediate transfer unit.

—

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting restriction

exceeded.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by Job

Accounting. Cannot print any more. This

job is canceled. Press [End].

—

Job separator tray is full of paper. Is the maximum capacity of the

job separator exceeded?

Take some paper out of the job

separator. Printing then resumes.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— PostScript error has occurred.

The job is canceled. Press [End].

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Low temperature. Adjust room

temp.

— Adjust the temperature and the humidity

of your room.

1-3

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-17

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. — Internal error has occurred. Make a note

of the error code displayed on the touch

panel, and contact your Service

Representative.

—

Maximum number of scanned

pages.

Is the acceptable scanning count

exceeded?

Only one copy of the scanned pages is

available.

Press [Continue] to print, send or store

the scanned pages.

Press [Cancel] to cancel printing,

sending or storing.

—

Memory is full.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— Unable to continue the job as the

memory is used up.

Press [Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

— The process cannot be performed due

to insufficient memory. If only [End] is

available, press [End]. The job will be

canceled.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper is left. — Remove paper from the document

finisher.

—

Paper jam. — If a paper jam occurs, the machine will

stop and the location of the jam will be

indicated on the touch panel. Leave the

machine on and follow the instruction to

remove the jammed paper.

10-23

Print overrun. — Warning. Low printer memory. The job

was paused. Press [Continue] to re-start

the job.

—

10-18

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

RAM disk error.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— An error has occurred on the RAM disk.

Job is canceled. Press [End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Restart the system or turn the power

OFF/ON. If the error still occurs, divide

the file into smaller files.

04: Insufficient space on the RAM disk.

Increase the RAM disk size by changing

[RAM Disk Setting] in the system menu.

NOTE: The range of RAM disk size

can be increased by selecting

[Printer Priority] in Optional

Memory.

9-23

Removable memory error.* Is writing to a removable

memory prohibited?

An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Press [End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: Connect a removable memory that

can be written to.

—

— An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Press [End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Restart the system or turn the power

OFF/ON. If the error still occurs, the

removable memory is not compatible

with the machine. Use the removable

memory formatted by this machine. If

the removable memory cannot be

formatted, it is damaged. Connect a

compatible removable memory.

7-2

Removable Memory is full.* — Job is canceled. Press [End].

Insufficient free space in the removable

memory. Delete unneeded files.

—

Remove originals in the

document processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the document

processor.

—

Replace all originals and press

[Continue].

— Remove originals from the document

processor, put them back in their original

order, and place them again. Press

[Continue] to resume printing.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Replace MK. — Replacement of the parts in the

maintenance kit is necessary at every

200,000 pages of printing and requires

professional servicing. Contact your

Service Representative.

—

10-19

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is full.*

* When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses.

— Scanning cannot be performed due to

insufficient memory of scanner. Only

one copy of the scanned pages is

available. Press [Continue] to print,

send or store the scanned pages. Press

[Cancel] to cancel the printing job.

—

Send error.* — An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is canceled. Press

[End].

Refer to Responding to Send Error for

the error code and corrective actions.

10-20

Set cassette. Have the paper width guide and

paper length guide been loaded

properly?

Load the paper width guide and paper

length guide properly so that there is no

space between the guides and the

paper.

3-3

Staple is empty.* Has any of the document finisher

run out of staples?

If the staples are depleted, the machine

will stop and the location of staple

depletion will be indicated on the touch

panel.

Leave the machine on and follow the

instruction to replace the staple case.

Press [Continue] to print without

stapling.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

10-5

Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the machine will

stop and the location of the jam will be

indicated on the touch panel.

Leave the machine on and follow the

instruction to remove the jammed

staple.

10-27

System error. — System error has occurred. Follow the

instructions on the touch panel.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The cover is open. Is there any cover which is

open?

Close the cover indicated on the touch

panel.

—

The phone receiver is off the

hook.

— Put down the receiver. —

The slit glass requires cleaning. — Clean the slit glass using the cleaning

cloth supplied with the document

processor.

10-6

This memory is not formatted. Is the removable memory

formatted by this machine?

Perform [Format] on this machine. 8-11

10-20

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

Responding to Send Error

Toner is empty. [C][M][Y][K] — Replace the toner container. 10-2

Toner is running out. [C][M][Y][K] — It is almost time to replace the toner

container. Obtain a new toner container.

—

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown Toner Installed. Is the installed toner container

our own brand?

We will not be liable for any damage

caused by the use of third party supplies

in this machine.

10-2

Unknown Toner Installed. PC

[C][M][Y][K]

Does the installed toner

container's regional specification

match the machine's?

Install the specified container. 10-2

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Warning low memory. — Job cannot be started. Try again later. —

Code Error Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the COMMAND

CENTER.

2-24

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. 6-20

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. 6-19

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

• Host name

•Path

6-20

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the followings on the COMMAND CENTER.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

2-24

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

6-20

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-21

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

6-20

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

6-20

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE: If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot

send the e-mail.

6-18

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on the COMMAND CENTER. 2-24

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER.

Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER.

1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the COMMAND

CENTER.

2-24

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND

CENTER.

2-24

1132 Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

2-24

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

2-24

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and COMMAND CENTER.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

Code Error Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-22

Troubleshooting > Responding to Error Messages

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Failed to send via FTP.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the

COMMAND CENTER.

2-24

3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the

recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient. —

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

—Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this error occurs

several times, make a note of the displayed error code and

contact your service representative.

2-12

Code Error Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-23

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper Jam. and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to

remove the jammed paper.

How to read the screen

Jam Location Indicators

Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam.

Precautions with Paper Jams

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

• Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

• Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed

again.

No. Paper Jam Message Reference Page

1Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose tray. 10-24

2Clear the paper jammed in right cover 1. 10-24

3Clear the paper jammed in cassette 1. 10-25

4Clear the paper jammed in right cover 3. 10-25

5Clear the paper jammed in cassette 2. 10-26

6Clear the paper jammed in cassette 3.

7Clear the paper jammed in the finisher. 10-26

8Clear the staple jammed in the finisher. 10-27

9Clear the paper jammed in the bridge unit. 10-27

10 Clear the paper jammed in the document processor. 10-28

Caution

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of

getting burned.

10:10

Clear the paper jammed in

cassette 1.

Press [Next >] to follow

the instructions.

JAM 0501

Paper jam.

< Back Next >

GE0001_00

Displays the processing

method.

Displays the current

step.

Advances to the next

step.

Returns to the

previous step.

Puts the current step on hold.

10-24

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Multi Purpose Tray

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.

Inside the Right Cover 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 1.

Caution

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as

there is a danger of getting burned.

10-25

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Cassette 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.

Inside the Right Cover 3

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 3.

10-26

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Cassette 2 or 3

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 or 3.

Optional Document Finisher

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document finisher.

10-27

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam

Follow the steps below to clear staple jams in the optional document finisher.

Bridge Unit

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the bridge unit.

10-28

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Document Processor

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Paper Feeder (single cassette) ............................................................................................................... 11-3

Paper Feeder (double cassette) ............................................................................................................. 11-3

Document Finisher .................................................................................................................................. 11-3

FAX Kit .................................................................................................................................................... 11-3

Expansion Memory ................................................................................................................................. 11-3

Card Authentication Kit ........................................................................................................................... 11-4

Gigabit Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................... 11-5

USB Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................ 11-5

Optional Function .................................................................................................................................... 11-5

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-7

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-10

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-11

Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-11

Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-14

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-18

Common functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-18

Copy functions ...................................................................................................................................... 11-19

Printer functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-20

Scanner ................................................................................................................................................ 11-20

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-21

Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option) ............................................................................................... 11-21

Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option) .............................................................................................. 11-21

Document Finisher (option) .................................................................................................................. 11-22

Environmental Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-22

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-23

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

Document Finisher

Paper Feeder (double cassette) Paper Feeder (single cassette)

FAX Kit

Expansion Memory

Gigabit Ethernet Board

Card Authentication Kit

11-3

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Paper Feeder (single cassette)

An additional cassette identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as Cassettes 1.

Paper Feeder (double cassette)

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and

loading method are the same as Cassettes 1.

Document Finisher

The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies. The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting.

Sorted finished copies may also be stapled. For further details, refer to the document finisher Operation Guide.

FAX Kit

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a

computer. For further details, refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide.

Expansion Memory

To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory

module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select

additional memory module from 256, 512 or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 2048 MB.

Precautions for Handling the Memory Module

To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe

(faucet) or other large metal object before handling the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic

wrist strap, if possible, when you install the memory module.

Installing the Memory Module

1Power off.

Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

Correct Incorrect

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

2Remove the covers.

3Install the memory module.

1Remove the memory module from its package.

2With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with

the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.

3Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.

4Reinstall the covers.

Removing the Memory Module

To remove a memory module, remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then, carefully push

out the two socket clamps. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove.

Verifying the Expanded Memory

To verify that the memory module is working properly, test it by printing a status page.

Refer to Report on page 9-5.

Card Authentication Kit

User login administration can be performed using IC cards. To do so, it is necessary to register IC card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the IC Card

Authentication Kit Operation Guide.

IMPORTANT

Before inserting a memory module in the machine, make sure that the machine is

switched off.

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Gigabit Ethernet Board

The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Since the kit was

designed to work with TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk protocols, in the same way as the main unit, it fulfills

the network printing demands on Windows, Macintosh, and UNIX environments. This expansion kit is also compatible

with ThinPrint.

USB Keyboard

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. Please contact your dealer

or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one.

Optional Function

You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine. You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial

basis.

UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.)

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.

1Display the screen.

NOTE

Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

NOTE

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and

password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on

page 9-37 for the default login user name and password.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

10:10

Printer

System

Date/Timer

4/5

System

Optional Function

10:10

2/2

System Menu/Counter.

< Back

GB0511_01

GB0054_03

Use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

2Start using an application.

1Select the desired application and press [Activate].

2Select [Official] and enter the license key using the numeric keys.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key.

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial].

IMPORTANT

If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to

use the application

System - Optional Function

10:10System Menu/Counter.

IC CARD AUTHENTI...

Activate

1/1

End

GB0557_00

2Displays details for individual applications.

Activate

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Trial

Official

Cancel

1/1

Next >

GB0608_00

Activate - License Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

< Back OKCancel

GB0609_00

11-7

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

NOTE

QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the System

Menu/Counter key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose desired layout. QWERTY layout is

used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

No. Display/Key Description

1 Display Displays entered characters.

2 Keyboard Press the character to enter.

3 [ABC] / [Symbol] Select the characters that are entered. To enter symbols or numbers,

select [Symbol].

4 [A/a] / [a/A] Press to switch between upper case and lower case.

5 Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display.

6 [Input] / [Limit] Display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of

characters entered.

7 Delete Key Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

8 Space Key Press to insert a space.

9 Enter Key Press to enter a line break.

10 [Cancel] Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before

the entry was made.

11 [< Back] Press to return to the previous screen.

12 [OK] / [Next >] Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen.

10 12

45 7

GB0057_E01

11-8

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Number/Symbol Entry Screen

No. Display/Key Description

13 [S]/[T] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, press the

cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to

enter.

GB0057_E02

GB0057_E03

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below to enter ‘List A-1’ for an example.

1Enter 'List', (space).

To shift from lower case to upper case letters, press [a/A]. To shift from upper case to lower

case letters, press [A/a].

2Enter 'A-1'.

To enter numbers or symbols, press [ABC] to display [Symbol].

3Register the characters you entered.

Press [Next>]. The entered characters are registered.

1, 3

GB0057_E11

GB0057_E12

GB0057_E13

GB0057_E14

11-10

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

Cassettes

Multi Purpose tray

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Recycled paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R,

A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

500 (80 g/m²)

Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets

Plain paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Recycled paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Colored paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R, Executive, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R,

B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio, 16K-R, 16K

Other sizes:

Portrait - 3-7/8 to 11-5/8" or 98 to 297 mm

Landscape - 5-7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm

100 (80 g/m²)

Plain paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Recycled paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Colored paper (60 to 256 g/m²)

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, 216 × 340 mm, 8K 25 (80 g/m²)

Postcards Postcards (100 × 148 mm) 20

Oufukuhagaki (return postcard) Return postcard (148 × 200 mm) 10

Envelopes Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10

(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6

(Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4

Other sizes:

Portrait — 3-7/8 to 11-5/8" or 98 to 297 mm

Landscape — 5-7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm

11-11

Appendix > Paper

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredient

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These

paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 60 to 256 g/m²

Multi purpose tray: 60 to 256 g/m²

Thickness 0.086 to 0.230 mm

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90°±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Grain direction Long grain (paper supply direction)

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-12

Appendix > Paper

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90°±0.2°.

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Thickness

Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or

with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper

thickness is between 0.086 and 0.230 mm.

Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray

A6-R (105 × 148 mm) A3 (297 × 420 mm)

B6-R (128 × 182 mm) B4 (257 × 364 mm)

Hagaki (100×148mm) A4 (297 × 210 mm)

Oufukuhagaki (148 × 200 mm) A4-R (210 × 297 mm)

Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2") B5 (257 × 182 mm)

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) B5-R (182 × 257 mm)

Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm) A5-R (148 × 210 mm)

Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm)

ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Ledger

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2") Legal

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8") Letter

Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Letter-R

Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2") Statement-R

Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) Oficio II

Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) 216 × 340 mm

Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm) 8K (273 × 394 mm)

16K (273 × 197 mm)

16K-R (197 × 273 mm)

11-13

Appendix > Paper

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can

be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper (from 60 g/m² to 64 g/m² or less)

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Cardstocks (Hagaki)

• Thick paper (from 106 g/m² to 256 g/m² or less)

• Labels

• Coated paper

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser

printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and labels.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight (overall paper weight) 104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.160 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive layer

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki

Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten

it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper

cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges

gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the

paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may

cause jams

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11. In addition, the pigments in the paper must

be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11. The colored ink must be able to withstand

the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy

paper used for calendars.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading

edge raised a few millimeters.

Burrs

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11-11; however, its whiteness may be considered

separately.

Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than

plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making

the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated

side appears slightly glossy.

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.

IMPORTANT

When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture

may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid

environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.

11-18

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Common functions

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Item Description

20 ppm model 25 ppm model

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotographic four color (CMYK) printing using tandem (4) drum system

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 256 g/m²

Multi Purpose Tray 60 to 256 g/m²

Media Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,

Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multi Purpose Tray Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R,

B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Multi Purpose Tray Maximum: Ledger/A3

Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m²)

Multi Purpose Tray 100 sheets (80 g/m², Letter/A4 or less),

25 sheets (80 g/m², more than Letter/A4)

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner Tray 250 sheets (80 g/m²)

Job Separator 30 sheets (80 g/m²)

Main Memory Standard 1024 MB

Maximum 2048 MB

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)

USB memory slot: 2 (USB Hi-Speed)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Option eKUIO: 2

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 15 to 80 %

Altitude 2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Warm-up Time

(22°C/71.6°F,

60%)

Power on 55 seconds or less 45 seconds or less

Sleep 23 seconds or less

Dimension (W × D × H) 23-1/4×23-1/4×29-7/16", 590×590×748 mm

11-19

Appendix > Specifications

Copy functions

Weight (with toner container) Approx. 176 lb/Approx. 80 kg

Space Required (W × D) 34-7/16×23-1/4", 874×590 mm (Using multi purpose tray)

Power Source 120 V Specification Model:120 V (60 Hz, 12 A)

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240V (50 Hz/ 60 Hz, 7.2 A)

Options Paper feeder (single cassette), Paper feeder (double cassette), Document finisher, FAX

kit, Expansion memory, Card Authentication Kit, Gigabit Ethernet Board, USB keyboard

Item Description

20 ppm model 25 ppm model

Max.Copy Speed Full color Black and White Full color Black and White

Letter/A4 20 sheets/min 20 sheets/min 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min

Letter-R/A4-R 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min

Ledger/A3 8 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 9 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

Legal/B4 9 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

B5 20 sheets/min 20 sheets/min 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min

B5-R 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min

A5-R 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) Full color: 13.6 seconds or less, Black and White: 11.7 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600×600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Ledger/A3)

Original Feed System Fixed

Item Description

20 ppm model 25 ppm model

11-20

Appendix > Specifications

Printer functions

Scanner

Item Description

20 ppm model 25 ppm model

Printing Speed Full color Black and White Full color Black and White

Letter/A4 20 sheets/min 20 sheets/min 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min

Letter-R/A4-R 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min

Ledger/A3 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

Legal/B4 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

B5 20 sheets/min 20 sheets/min 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min

B5-R 14 sheets/min 14 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min

A5-R 10 sheets/min 10 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min

First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) Full color: 14.0 seconds or less,

Black and White: 11.0 seconds or less

Full color: 12.0 seconds or less,

Black and White: 10.0 seconds or less

Resolution 600×600 dpi

Operating System Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server

2008, Apple Macintosh OS X

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL5c, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible)

Item Description

System requirements CPU: 600 Mhz or higher

RAM: 128 MB or more

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi, 200×400 dpi (Resolution

in FAX mode included)

File Format TIFF (JPEG6.0, tn2), JPEG, XPS, PDF (1.4, /A)

Scanning Speed*

* When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

1-sided B/W 40 Images/min, Color 40 Images/min

Network Protocol TCP/IP

Transmission System PC transmission SMB: Scan to SMB

FTP: Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL

E-mail

transmission

SMTP: Scan to E-mail

TWAIN scan**

** Available Operating System: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008

WIA scan***

*** Available Operating System: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Document Processor

Paper Feeder (single cassette) (option)

Paper Feeder (double cassette) (option)

Item Description

Original Feed Method Automatic feed

Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Paper Size Maximum: Ledger/A3, Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R

Paper Weight 45 to 160 g/m²

Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum

Mixed original sizes (auto selection): 30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 23-1/4×19-1/4×4-7/8"

590×489×123 mm

Weight Approx. 15.4 lb or less/Approx. 7 kg or less

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m², 1 cassette)

Paper Size Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-

R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 - 256 g/m²

Media types: standard, recycled, color

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 23-1/4×23-3/16×13-7/8"

590×589×352 mm

Weight Approx. 46 lb/ Approx. 21 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m², 2 cassette)

Paper Size Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-

R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 - 256 g/m²

Media types: standard, recycled, color

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 23-1/4×23-3/16×13-7/8"

590×589×352 mm

Weight Approx. 46 lb/ Approx. 21 kg

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Document Finisher (option)

Environmental Specifications

EN ISO 7779

Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size (Non-stapling) Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 8K: 250 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,

16K: 500 sheets

Supported Paper Weight 52 to 256 g/m² (Stapling: 90 g/m² or less)

Maximum Sheets for Stapling Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, A3, B4, 216 × 340 mm, 8K: 25 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 50 sheets

(Paper weight 90 g/m² or less)

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 16-3/8×20-1/2×10-7/8"

416×521×275.5 mm

Weight Approx. 26.4 lb/Approx. 12 kg

Item Description

Recovery time from Low Power Mode 10 seconds or less

Time to Low Power Mode 3 minutes

Recovery time from sleep 23 seconds or less

Time to sleep 20 ppm model: 20 minutes

25 ppm model: 30 minutes

Duplexing Standard

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-23

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

AppleTalk

AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and

also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed

if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP requires

a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0 to

169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assinged automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific

period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data

is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

11-24

Appendix > Glossary

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Enhanced WSD

Kyocera's proprietary web services.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like

more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to

view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables

printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms

along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

11-25

Appendix > Glossary

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

NetWare

Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a specialization

of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently

being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA (Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined

in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from

the list or entered at each time.

11-26

Appendix > Glossary

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all

network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of

the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first

section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length

after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP

address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host

address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be

sure to set the DHCP setting to Off.

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over

a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

Index-1

Index

Numerics

2-sided/Book Original 3-37

Address Book

Adding a Contact 6-24

Adding a Group 6-28

Editing and Deleting 6-31

Adjustment/Maintenance

Auto Color Correction 9-25

Background Density Adj. 9-25

Calibration 9-26

Color Registration 9-25

Correcting Black Line 9-25

Density Adjustment 9-25

Display Brightness 9-25

DP Adjustment 9-26

Drum Refresh 1 9-26

Laser Scanner Cleaning 9-26

Tone Curve Adjustment 9-26

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 9-25

AppleTalk 11-23

Setup 9-21

Applications 11-5

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-23

Auto Image Rotation 4-19

Auto-IP 11-23

Setup 9-18

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function 1-12

Auto Paper Selection 11-23

Auto Sleep 2-21, 11-23

Background Density Adjust 3-54

Bonjour 11-23

Setup 9-18

Cassette 2-2

Loading Paper 3-3

Paper Size and Media Type 9-8

Character Entry Method 11-7

Checking the Counter 3-11

Cleaning

Document Processor 10-6

Glass Platen 10-6

Cleaning Cloth 2-3

Coated Paper 11-17

Collate/Offset 3-43

Color Balance 4-17

Color Registration 9-25

Color Selection 3-59

Color Toner Empty Action 9-14

Combine 4-12

2 in 1 4-12

4 in 1 4-12

Border Line 4-12

COMMAND CENTER 2-23

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-10

Power Cable 2-11

USB Cable 2-11

Connection Method 2-8

Continuous Scan 3-39

Conventions in This Guide 1-13

Copying 4-1

Copying Settings

Auto % Priority 9-15

Auto Paper Selection 9-15

Reserve Next Priority 9-15

Date/Timer 2-22, 9-23

Auto Error Clear 9-24

Auto Panel Reset 9-23

Auto Sleep 9-23

Date/Time 9-23

Date Format 9-23

Error Clear Timer 9-24

Interrupt Clear Timer 9-24

Low Power Timer 9-24

Panel Reset Timer 9-24

Sleep Level 9-24

Sleep Timer 9-24

Time Zone 9-23

Default

Auto Image Rotation 9-12

Background Density Adj. 9-12

Collate/Offset 9-12

Color Selection (Copy) 9-12

Color Selection (Send/Store) 9-12

Continuous Scan 9-12

EcoPrint 9-12

E-mail Subject/Body 9-13

File Format 9-12

File Name Entry 9-13

File Separation 9-12

FTP Encrypted TX 9-13

Image Quality 9-13

JPEG/TIFF Print 9-13

Margin 9-12

Original Image 9-12

Original Orientation 9-12

PDF/A Setting 9-13

Prevent Bleed-through 9-12

Scan Resolution 9-12

XPS Fit to Page 9-13

Zoom 9-12

Default Gateway 11-23

Setup 9-18

Default Screen 9-9

Density 3-50

Index-2

Destination 6-15

Checking and Editing 6-22

Choosing by One Touch Key 6-17

Choosing from the Address Book 6-15

Dest. Check before Send 9-15

Entering a New E-mail Address 6-18

Entry Check for New Dest. 9-15

Multi Sending 6-23

Specifying a New PC Folder 6-19

Device Status 8-11

FAX 8-12

Printer 8-12

Removable Memory 8-12

Scanner 8-11

DHCP 11-23

Setup 9-18

DHCP (IPv6) 11-23

Setup 9-19

Document Processor 2-2

dpi 11-24

Duplex 4-8

EcoPrint 11-24

Copy 4-15

Printer 9-16

Emulation 11-24

Selection 9-16

Encrypted PDF Password 7-11

Energy Saving Control Function 1-12

Energy Star Program 1-12

Enhanced WSD 9-21, 11-24

Environment 1-3

Error Handling 9-14

Expansion Memory 11-3

Favorites 3-14

Editing and Deleting 3-18

Registering 3-14

Using 3-20

FAX Kit 11-3

File Format 3-57

File Name Entry 3-62

File Separation 6-39

First Print Time 11-19, 11-20

Front Cover 2-2

FTP 11-24

FTP Client (Transmission)

Protocol Detail 9-20

FTP Encrypted TX 6-41

FTP Server (Reception)

Protocol Detail 9-20

Glossary 11-23

GPL/LGPL 1-9

Grayscale 3-59, 11-24

Handles 2-2, 2-4

Help 11-24

Help Screen 3-28

Host Name 9-18

HTTP

Protocol Detail 9-20

HTTPS

Protocol Detail 9-20

HTTP Security 9-22

Hue Adjustment 4-16

Inner Tray 2-2

Interface Block 9-22

Interrupt Copy 4-20

IP Address 11-24

Setup 9-18

IPP

Protocol Detail 9-20

IPP over SSL

Protocol Detail 9-20

IPP Security 9-22

IPSec

Setup 9-22

Job

Canceling 3-29

Checking History 8-6

Checking Status 8-2

Details of the Status Screens 8-3

Pause and Resumption 8-3

Sending the Log History 8-7

Job Accounting 9-58

Adding an Account 9-63

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-69

Default Setting 9-73

Editing and Deleting 9-65

Enabling/Disabling 9-61

Logout 9-62

Printing an Accounting Report 9-71

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-67

Job Box 5-6

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents

5-11

Private Print 5-6

Proof and Hold 5-8

Job Finish Notice 3-60

Job Separator 2-2

JPEG/TIFF Print 7-12

Keyboard Layout 9-15

KPDL 11-24

Language 9-5

Index-3

LAN Interface 9-22

LDAP

Protocol Detail 9-20

LDAP Security 9-22

Legal Information 1-9

Legal Restriction on Copying 1-8

Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-8

Logout 3-13, 9-62

Low Power Mode 2-20

LPD

Protocol Detail 9-20

Machine Setup Wizard 2-22

Main Memory 9-23

Main Power Switch 2-4

Manual Setting (IPv6) 9-19

Margin 3-45

Measurement 9-14

Mixed Size Originals 3-35

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-11

Multi Purpose Tray 2-3, 11-25

Loading Paper 3-5

Paper Size and Media Type 9-8

Multi Sending 6-23

NetBEUI 11-25

Protocol Detail 9-20

NetWare 11-25

Setup 9-21

Network

Preparing 2-8

Setup 2-22, 9-18

Network Cable

Connecting 2-10

Network Interface 2-4, 2-9

One Touch Key 6-33

Adding a Destination 6-33

Editing and Deleting 6-35

Open SSL License 1-9

Operation Panel 2-2, 2-6

Option

Card Authentication Kit 11-4

Document Finisher 11-3

Expansion Memory 11-3

FAX Kit 11-3

Gigabit Ethernet Board 11-5

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-3

Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-3

Optional Function 11-5

Optional Memory 9-23

Option Interface 2-4

Original Image 3-52

Original Loaded Indicator 2-3

Original Orientation 3-34

Originals

Custom Original Size 9-9

Loading Originals 3-7

Original Auto Detect 9-10

Original Size 3-32

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Original SSLeay License 1-10

Original Table 2-3

Original Width Guides 2-3

Paper

Appropriate Paper 11-11

Before Loading 3-2

Cassette 9-8

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8-13

Custom Paper Size 9-10

Default Paper Source 9-10

Loading Envelopes 3-6

Loading in the Cassettes 3-3

Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3-5

Media for Auto 9-10

Media Type Setting 9-10

Multi Purpose Tray 9-8

Setup 9-10

Size and Media 9-8

Special Paper 11-14

Special Paper Action 9-11

Specifications 11-11

Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-3

Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-3

Paper Feed Mode 9-17

Paper Length Guide 2-3

Paper Output 3-42, 9-13

Paper Selection 3-41

Paper Width Guide 2-3

Part Names 2-2

PDF/A 11-25

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-25

POP3 (E-mail RX)

Protocol Detail 9-20

PostScript 11-25

Power Cable

Connecting 2-11

Power Off 2-12

Power On 2-12

PPM 11-25

Precautions for Use 1-3

Preparing Cables 2-9

Prevent Bleed-through 3-55

Printer Driver 11-25

Installing 2-14

Index-4

Printer Settings

Color Setting 9-16

Copies 9-16

CR Action 9-17

Duplex 9-16

EcoPrint 9-16

Emulation 9-16

Form Feed TimeOut 9-17

Gloss Mode 9-17

LF Action 9-17

Orientation 9-16

Override A4/Letter 9-16

Paper Feed Mode 9-17

Wide A4 9-17

Printing 5-1

Printing Speed 11-20

Priority Override 3-63

Quick Setup Wizard 3-26

RA (Stateless) 11-25

Setup 9-19

Raw Port

Protocol Detail 9-20

Recycled Paper 1-12, 11-17

Regarding Trade Names 1-9

Replacing Staples 10-5

Report Print 9-5

Accounting Report 9-6

Font List 9-5

Network Status 9-5

Service Status 9-6

Status Page 9-5

Resolution 11-19, 11-20

Restart 9-4

Result Report Settings 9-6

Right Cover 2-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Saturation 4-18

Scan Resolution 3-51

Secure Protocol 9-22

Send as E-mail 6-2, 11-25

E-mail Subject/Body 6-40

Sending 6-1

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6-5

Send as E-mail 6-2

Send to Folder (SMB/FTP) 6-2

Sending E-mail 2-24

Sending Size 6-37

Send Settings

Color TIFF Compression 9-16

Default Screen 9-16

Dest. Check before Send 9-15

Entry Check for New Dest. 9-15

Send and Forward 9-16

Sharpness 3-53

Shortcuts

Editing and Deleting 3-24

Registering 3-22

Using 3-25

Sleep 2-21

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB Client (Transmission)

Protocol Detail 9-20

SMTP 11-26

SMTP (E-mail TX)

Protocol Detail 9-20

SNMP

Protocol Detail 9-20

SNMPv3

Protocol Detail 9-20

Solving Malfunctions 10-8

Sound 9-9

Specifications

Document Finisher 11-22

Document Processor 11-21

Environmental Specifications 11-22

Machine 11-18

Paper Feeder (double cassette) 11-21

Paper Feeder (single cassette) 11-21

Printer 11-19, 11-20

Scanner 11-20

Staple 3-48

Status 11-26

Status/Job Cancel 8-1

Status Page 11-26

Storing Size 7-14

Subnet Mask 11-26

Setup 9-18

Symbols 1-2

System Menu 9-2

TCP/IP 11-26

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Setup 9-18

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-26

ThinPrint

Protocol Detail 9-20

ThinPrintOverSSL

Protocol Detail 9-20

Tone Curve Adjustment 9-26

Toner Container 2-3

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8-13

Replacement 10-2

Touch Panel 2-7

TWAIN 11-26

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-18

Unknown Login User Name Job 9-75

USB 11-26

USB Cable

Connecting 2-11

USB Interface 2-4, 2-9

Index-5

USB Keyboard Type 9-15

USB Memory

Printing Documents 7-2

Removing 7-8

Saving Documents 7-5

USB Memory Slot 2-2

User Login Administration 9-33

Adding a User 9-37

Editing and Deleting 9-43

Enabling/Disabling 9-35

Group Authorization 9-52

Local User Authorization 9-41

My Panel 9-42

Obtain Network User Property 9-56

Simple Login 9-46

User Property 9-7

Waste Toner Box 2-3

Replacement 10-4

WIA 11-26

Setting WIA Driver 2-19

WSD Print

Setup 9-21

WSD Scan

Setup 9-21

XPS Fit to Page 7-13

Zoom

Copy 4-5

Send/Store 3-56

Index-6

Rev.2 2011.07

2K0KMEN002

Kyocera FS C8025MFP C8020MFP_FS C8025MFP_OG_ENG User Manual To The 06751b40 F46f 47cc 91f5 8e31128eb8b4

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation